Skip to content
Print view of the handbookOnly one area:

The handbook

Atlas of the Universe

Every feature of the platform in one place — what it is, who it is for, why it exists and how to use it. With click paths, screenshots and QR codes that take you straight to trying it.

As of 16.10.2026

Contents

  1. 1. Learning
    1. Course player
    2. Switching learning modes
    3. Sticky note, highlight, snippet, notepad
    4. Flashcards
    5. Pocket quiz
    6. Mind map
    7. Podcast in the player
    8. Podcasts
    9. Tutor chat
    10. Role play
    11. Export from the player
    12. Mastery (learning progress)
    13. ECTS overview
    14. Explainer video (short clip)
    15. Dashboard tour
    16. Interactive learning
    17. Fellow learner's question on the slide
    18. Further languages
    19. Learning workshop
    20. Competence diagnosis (competence check)
  2. 2. Teaching
    1. Lecturer area
    2. Classes (cohorts)
    3. Course texts in your own language
    4. Projects & assessment
    5. Profile & topics for theses
    6. Office hours
    7. Checking and reviewing papers
    8. Academic guideline
    9. Competences: switch courses, review disputed assessments
    10. Lecturers' fees
  3. 3. Exams & Credentials
    1. Exams
    2. Proctoring in exams
    3. Achievement archive & ECTS account
    4. Certificates & transcripts
    5. Badges
    6. Fact check of the content
    7. Imported questions as an exam
  4. 4. Studies & Administration
    1. Application & admission
    2. Student administration
    3. Surveys
    4. Doctorate
    5. Careers & talent
    6. Employer matching
    7. Library
    8. Notice board
    9. Finances
    10. Statistics
    11. Document audit
    12. Company partners
  5. 5. Course Workshop & Avatars
    1. Course workshop at a glance
    2. Creating a course from material
    3. Phase 1 · Content: outline and slides
    4. Phase 2 · Design: look & sound
    5. Phase 3 · Speakers & Interaction
    6. Several speakers on one slide
    7. Phase 4 · Publish
    8. Avatars & voices
    9. My avatar
    10. Text models of the workshop
    11. Workshop credits
    12. Explanatory graphics and images
  6. 6. Stage
    1. New slide editor (“Stage”)
    2. Interactive slides: levers, sliders, scenarios
    3. Live source: the phone streams into the slide
    4. Speaker spot
    5. Presenting
    6. Presenter view
    7. Zoom canvas and camera path
    8. Beam from phone
    9. Voice and gestures in the slide editor
    10. A second device edits along (“Dual Canvas”)
  7. 7. Community
    1. Watching together (live co-learning)
    2. Camera in the watch-along room
    3. Inviting co-learners
    4. Group work
    5. Study partners
    6. Community
    7. Mentoring
    8. Student elections
    9. Alumni
  8. 8. People Development
    1. People development at a glance
    2. Learning paths and templates
    3. Assignments with deadline, buddy and mentor
    4. Onboarding journeys
    5. Mandatory training & refreshers
    6. Competency matrix & gap analysis
    7. Workforce, units & import
    8. The manager's view
    9. Reminders by email
    10. Training records
    11. Human resources
    12. Competence continuity
  9. 9. Operations & Administration (Control)
    1. Feature catalogue: switch every feature per tenant
    2. Modules & prices
    3. Demo mode (button “Features”)
    4. Tenants & brand
    5. Costs, usage & controlling
    6. IT control centre
    7. Accounts, roles & permissions
    8. Seats per customer
    9. Sign-in via your own university (SSO)
    10. Data protection: deletion calendar, dry run and report
    11. Support
    12. Tour switch
    13. Change log and regulatory watch
    14. Quality and transparency page
    15. Interfaces to other learning systems
    16. This handbook
    17. Glossary and “What's new”
    18. Knowledge section “Knowledge”
    19. Maike, the concierge
    20. Administration: overview, bar and tools
    21. Assignment of administration surfaces
    22. IT administration & access rights
    23. Test students and your own test courses
    24. Abuse and network addresses
    25. Access codes and voucher health
    26. Enquiries from the website
    27. Audit log and audit evidence bundle
    28. Pronunciation of the avatar voice
    29. Content quality, quality reports and errata
    30. Handing over course packages
    31. Launch health and diagnostics
  10. 10. Apps
    1. Mobile in the browser
    2. Add to home screen
    3. Student app
    4. Apps for the app stores
    5. The stage as an app of its own
  11. 11. Technology & Security
    1. How the platform is built
    2. Operation and data in the EU
    3. AI on the platform — what it may and may not do
  12. 12. Outlook
    1. Load test for many concurrent users
    2. The avatar in the meeting
    3. Universe Ultimate Suite — the product map
    4. Universe Stage
    5. Universe Live
    6. Universe Studio
    7. Universe Avatar
    8. Universe Compass
    9. Universe Exam
    10. Universe Proof
    11. Universe Campus
    12. Universe Recap
    13. Universe Room
    14. Universe Lingua
    15. Universe Guide
    16. Universe Control
    17. Universe Competence Academy
    18. Universe Classroom
    19. Universe Tutoring
    20. Universe Corporate
    21. Universe Coaching
    22. Curriculum pipeline DACH
    23. One competence engine, several learning applications

Chapter 1

Learning

Everything learners experience in a course: the course player with a speaking avatar, the learning tools next to it, the learning modes, your own mastery and the competence diagnosis, which checks whether you can apply what you have learned.

Course player

liveStudentsTeaching staff

The place where a course runs: slide, speaking avatar, subtitles, learning tools and questions to the presenter — on one surface.

Why#

A course should feel like a good lecture in which you may ask questions at any time. The player carries slides and presentation, remembers your progress and lets learners learn at their own pace and in their own language.

How it works#

Click pathDashboardMy coursesOpen course

  1. 1Open a course in the dashboard under “My courses” — or go straight into the trial course without an account via “Try it now”.
  2. 2Start the presentation with the round play button on the left; the avatar speaks the narration of the slide (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The presenter in a circle; below it playback, skip buttons of ten seconds, language choice, speed and “Give me an example”.
    The presenter in a circle; below it playback, skip buttons of ten seconds, language choice, speed and “Give me an example”.

    Fig. 1 The presenter in a circle; below it playback, skip buttons of ten seconds, language choice, speed and “Give me an example”.

  3. 3Move from slide to slide with “Next →” and “← Back” in the bar at the bottom; the line at the top shows module, slide and the remaining time (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The bar below the slide: Back, “Ask …” (speak or type), “Ask me”, “Someone asks a question”, Learning mode and Next.
    The bar below the slide: Back, “Ask …” (speak or type), “Ask me”, “Someone asks a question”, Learning mode and Next.

    Fig. 2 The bar below the slide: Back, “Ask …” (speak or type), “Ask me”, “Someone asks a question”, Learning mode and Next.

  4. 4Ask a question: choose “Ask …” at the bottom and speak (microphone) or type (speech bubble) — the avatar answers with reference to the slide.
  5. 5Open learning tools above the slide: flashcards, pocket quiz, mind map, podcast, tutor chat (Fig. 3).
    Fig. 3 The head of the player: module, slide and remaining time, the course title, the toolbar with the five learning tools, the learning path and the note tools.
    The head of the player: module, slide and remaining time, the course title, the toolbar with the five learning tools, the learning path and the note tools.

    Fig. 3 The head of the player: module, slide and remaining time, the course title, the toolbar with the five learning tools, the learning path and the note tools.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

  • The learning tools, the tutor chat, the learning modes and the role play can each be switched per tenant (see the respective entries).
  • Every learner chooses the language of the presentation themselves; which languages exist as finished video is set by the author in the workshop.

The screen at a glance#

  • Top left: module, slide and remaining time (“Module 1 · Slide 13 / 74 · approx. 680 min left”), plus “Hide avatar”, “Focus” and full screen.
  • Top centre: the course title and below it the toolbar (flashcards, pocket quiz, mind map, podcast, tutor chat).
  • Below that the learning path: every module as a dot up to the goal — one click jumps to the module.
  • Below that the note tools: sticky note, highlight, snippet, notepad.
  • Top right: “Live co-learning” and “Invite”.
  • Left: the avatar in a circle, below it playback, skip buttons of ten seconds, language choice, speed (continuous) and “Give me an example”.
  • Centre: the slide. Above it a short notice that presenter and voice-over are AI-generated and the content has been checked by experts — with “What exactly?” for the details.
  • Bottom: Back, “Ask …” (speak or type), “Ask me”, “Someone asks a question”, “Follow-up questions”, “Learning mode” and Next.

Asking questions and being asked#

The avatar is not a film that simply runs: with “Ask …” you ask a question by voice or text, and the answer refers to the current slide and the course. Answers pass through a verification chain that holds statements against sources; whatever cannot be supported is marked as such.

“Ask me” reverses the direction: the avatar asks a comprehension question. “Someone asks a question” lets a fellow learner ask a typical question, as it would come up in a lecture hall. “Follow-up questions” controls whether the avatar probes further when answers are unclear.

If a running answer is interrupted, the avatar finishes the sentence, pauses briefly and then continues — nobody is cut off mid-word.

Labelled as AI-generated#

Presenter and voice-over are AI-generated; this is visible above every slide. “What exactly?” explains what is generated and what has been checked by people. This follows the transparency obligation of the European AI Act (Art. 50).

On phone and tablet#

On small screens the slide runs from edge to edge. It can be moved and enlarged with a finger; the handle always stays in view, and a back button restores the starting position. Subtitles can be switched on at the speaker bubble.

When the quota runs low#

Avatar minutes and conversations are counted. At 80 and 95 percent of the quota there is a notice; at 100 percent the dialogue ends with a friendly closing message instead of an abrupt cut-off. Slides and learning tools remain available.

Tips#

  • Focus mode hides all controls. There are three ways back: via the narrow strip at the edge, by moving the mouse pointer or with Esc.
  • The font size of the slide can be changed at the top right of the slide with “A” and “A” — handy on small screens.
  • “Give me an example” below the avatar provides a vivid example for exactly this slide.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe

Switching learning modes

liveStudents

A menu in the player in which learners choose the didactics: be asked Socratic questions, explain back, see an example or practise.

Why#

People learn differently. Those who only listen forget faster than those who have to explain. The learning mode makes the four ways that are built into the player anyway findable in one place.

How it works#

Click pathCourseBottom barLearning mode

  1. 1In the course, click “Learning mode” at the bottom right.
  2. 2Choose a way: “Ask me (Socratic)”, “Explain it back to me (Feynman)”, “Show me an example” or “Interactive exercise” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The open menu “Learning mode” with the four ways of learning and one sentence of explanation each.
    The open menu “Learning mode” with the four ways of learning and one sentence of explanation each.

    Fig. 1 The open menu “Learning mode” with the four ways of learning and one sentence of explanation each.

  3. 3When explaining back, answer in your own words — you get feedback on what is missing (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “Explain it back to me”: the field for your own explanation, by microphone or typed, with “Evaluate”.
    “Explain it back to me”: the field for your own explanation, by microphone or typed, with “Evaluate”.

    Fig. 2 “Explain it back to me”: the field for your own explanation, by microphone or typed, with “Evaluate”.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Lernplattform (always booked)

The four ways#

  • Ask me (Socratic) — the presenter asks a question about the slide; if the answer is narrowly wrong, “Close, but not quite” comes with the correct solution.
  • Explain it back to me (Feynman) — explain in your own words, by microphone or typed, then “Evaluate”.
  • Show me an example — a vivid example for exactly this slide; with “Next” a different perspective on the same content.
  • Interactive exercise — only on slides for which the author has created an exercise.

What the evaluation of explaining back shows#

  • Understanding in percent.
  • “You explained that well” — what is covered.
  • “You could still add this” — what is missing.
  • “Small stumbling block” — a misconception, if one was noticed.

Every explanation with its feedback then appears in the learning progress under “Explain it back to me — history”. The evaluation politely rejects explanations that are too short.

Tips#

  • The interactive exercise only exists on slides for which the author has created an exercise — otherwise the item is greyed out with a reason.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe

Sticky note, highlight, snippet, notepad

liveStudents

Your own notes right on the course: sticky notes on the slide, highlights, image snippets and a notepad that runs alongside.

Why#

Whoever writes while learning remembers more. The notes stay attached to the slide on which they were made and are there again on the next visit.

How it works#

Click pathCourseNote tools below the learning path

  1. 1In the course, below the learning path, choose one of the tools: sticky note, highlight, snippet or notepad (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The note tools below the learning path: sticky note, highlight, snippet, notepad and the collected snippets.
    The note tools below the learning path: sticky note, highlight, snippet, notepad and the collected snippets.

    Fig. 1 The note tools below the learning path: sticky note, highlight, snippet, notepad and the collected snippets.

  2. 2Sticky note: click on the slide and write. Highlight: drag across the slide. Snippet: drag out an area and save it.
  3. 3Delete via the bin on the respective element — this also works while a tool is active.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The four tools in detail#

  • Sticky note — place it on the slide, write, shrink or delete it.
  • Highlight — choose a colour, then drag; several highlights per slide are possible.
  • Snippet — frame an area of the slide; it is saved as an image and lands in the “Snippets” tray, where it can be enlarged.
  • Notepad — notes on the whole course; “Current slide” inserts a reference to the slide, “Clear” empties the pad.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe

Flashcards

liveStudents

Cards with question and answer, generated from what the course is currently covering.

Why#

Repetition is the most effective form of learning. The cards are created from the course material without anyone having to write them.

How it works#

Click pathCourseToolbarFlashcards

  1. 1In the course, click “Flashcards” at the top.
  2. 2Choose the scope (“Up to here”, “Current module”, “All modules”), number of cards and difficulty (easy, medium, hard, mixed) and “Start card game” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The “Flashcards” window before the start: scope, number of cards and difficulty.
    The “Flashcards” window before the start: scope, number of cards and difficulty.

    Fig. 1 The “Flashcards” window before the start: scope, number of cards and difficulty.

  3. 3Before turning the card, state how confident you are; then turn it and choose “Knew it” or “Didn't know it” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 A flashcard with a question, the slider “How sure are you?” and the buttons for turning it.
    A flashcard with a question, the slider “How sure are you?” and the buttons for turning it.

    Fig. 2 A flashcard with a question, the slider “How sure are you?” and the buttons for turning it.

  4. 4At the end you see points, level and a calibration report; the cards can be taken away as a PDF or presentation file.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: Lernwerkzeuge

Points, levels and calibration#

The cards are a card game: the harder the card, the more points. The points determine a level — from beginner via advanced and very good up to expert.

The calibration report compares how confident you were with how often you were right. Three results: “A little overconfident” (where you were sure, you were wrong more often), “You underestimate yourself” or “Well calibrated”. A statement needs a few cards.

To your phone#

“To your phone” shows a QR code: scanned with the phone, the card game continues there. The code is valid for 14 days; alternatively “Copy link”.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?werkzeug=lernkarten

Pocket quiz

liveStudents

A short multiple-choice quiz in the player to check whether the material has sunk in.

Why#

A quick self-check in between — without a grade, without a record in the exam file.

How it works#

Click pathCourseToolbarPocket quiz

  1. 1In the course, open “Pocket quiz” at the top.
  2. 2Choose the scope, number of questions and difficulty and “Start quiz” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The pocket quiz before the start: scope, number of questions and difficulty.
    The pocket quiz before the start: scope, number of questions and difficulty.

    Fig. 1 The pocket quiz before the start: scope, number of questions and difficulty.

  3. 3For each question, state how confident you are and answer; every answer is resolved and explained immediately (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 A quiz question with the answers and the indication of how confident you are.
    A quiz question with the answers and the indication of how confident you are.

    Fig. 2 A quiz question with the answers and the indication of how confident you are.

  4. 4At the end: correct out of total, learning level and calibration report.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: Lernwerkzeuge

Why the quiz asks about confidence#

Whoever knows what they do not know learns in a more targeted way. That is why the quiz asks “How sure are you?” before every answer and shows at the end whether confidence and hit rate match — the upper bar shows how confident, the lower one how often correct. The closer the two, the better calibrated.

The pocket quiz does not count as an exam and does not end up in the exam file.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?werkzeug=quiz

Mind map

liveStudents

A movable, connected mind map of the material — drag, zoom, tap branches for details.

Why#

See connections instead of going slide by slide: the mind map shows how the concepts of a module or the whole course relate to each other.

How it works#

Click pathCourseToolbarMind map

  1. 1In the course, open “Mind map” at the top.
  2. 2Choose the scope: “Up to here”, “Current module” or “All modules” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The “Mind map” window with the choice of scope and the button “Create mind map”.
    The “Mind map” window with the choice of scope and the button “Create mind map”.

    Fig. 1 The “Mind map” window with the choice of scope and the button “Create mind map”.

  3. 3“Create mind map” — then tap, drag and zoom branches (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The finished mind map: the topic in the centre, the branches with the concepts of the module, below them the buttons for taking it away.
    The finished mind map: the topic in the centre, the branches with the concepts of the module, below them the buttons for taking it away.

    Fig. 2 The finished mind map: the topic in the centre, the branches with the concepts of the module, below them the buttons for taking it away.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: Lernwerkzeuge

How to use it#

  • Dragging moves the mind map, scrolling zooms.
  • Tapping a branch collapses or expands it.
  • The scope shows beforehand how many slides the mind map covers.
  • Export as PDF or presentation file.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?werkzeug=mindmap

Podcast in the player

liveStudents

The course material as a conversation between two voices to listen to — as a detailed podcast or as a short flashcast.

Why#

Learning on the go, during sport, on the train: the podcast sums up the material in audio form.

How it works#

Click pathCourseToolbarPodcast

  1. 1In the course, open “Podcast” at the top.
  2. 2Choose the format: “Podcast (2 voices)” or “Flashcast (short)” with one voice; plus length and scope (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The podcast window before generating: format (two voices or flashcast), length, own sources and scope.
    The podcast window before generating: format (two voices or flashcast), length, own sources and scope.

    Fig. 1 The podcast window before generating: format (two voices or flashcast), length, own sources and scope.

  3. 3Optionally add your own sources (up to ten PDFs).
  4. 4“Create podcast” — first the script is written, then the audio; play, pause, change speed, read the transcript (Fig. 2). “To your phone” shows a QR code that opens the episode on the phone (Fig. 3).
    Fig. 2 The podcast player in the course: title, speakers “Sophie & Max”, play, speed from 0.75× to 1.5× and the dialogue lines to read along.
    The podcast player in the course: title, speakers “Sophie & Max”, play, speed from 0.75× to 1.5× and the dialogue lines to read along.

    Fig. 2 The podcast player in the course: title, speakers “Sophie & Max”, play, speed from 0.75× to 1.5× and the dialogue lines to read along.

    Fig. 3 The same player with “To your phone” open: the QR code to scan and “Copy link”.
    The same player with “To your phone” open: the QR code to scan and “Copy link”.

    Fig. 3 The same player with “To your phone” open: the QR code to scan and “Copy link”.

  5. 5Every recording also lands in “My podcasts” and can be published directly in the public feed.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: Podcasts

Podcast or flashcast#

  • Podcast — two voices discuss the material as in a conversation.
  • Flashcast — one voice gets to the point briefly; the voice can be chosen.

Your own PDF sources flow into the script; the scope shows how many slides are covered.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?werkzeug=podcast

Podcasts

liveStudentsTeaching staff

Your own podcast library in the dashboard and a public feed with all published episodes.

Why#

What was created as a podcast in the player should not get lost — and good episodes should be available for others to hear.

How it works#

Click pathDashboardMy podcasts

  1. 1Open “My podcasts” in the dashboard: all your recordings are here, each one playable (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “My podcasts”: your own recordings with type, number of contributions, date, Listen and Publish.
    “My podcasts”: your own recordings with type, number of contributions, date, Listen and Publish.

    Fig. 1 “My podcasts”: your own recordings with type, number of contributions, date, Listen and Publish.

  2. 2Publish an episode with one click — it then appears in the public feed.
  3. 3Anyone can find the public feed under “Podcasts” without signing in.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Podcasts

What you can do in “My podcasts”#

  • Listen — every episode of your own with the number of contributions.
  • Publish — the episode appears in the public feed as the institution's own production.
  • Withdraw — the episode disappears from the feed again.
  • Delete.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/podcasts

Tutor chat

liveStudents

A written tutor next to the slide that answers questions about the course — read aloud on request.

Why#

Not every question is one you want to ask out loud. The tutor chat answers it calmly, with reference to the course.

How it works#

Click pathCourseToolbarTutor chat

  1. 1In the course, open “Tutor chat” at the top.
  2. 2Under “What shall we talk about?” choose the scope and “Start tutor chat” — the tutor first asks how you are getting on with the material and what you want to focus on (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The tutor chat before the start: “What shall we talk about?” with the choice of scope.
    The tutor chat before the start: “What shall we talk about?” with the choice of scope.

    Fig. 1 The tutor chat before the start: “What shall we talk about?” with the choice of scope.

  3. 3Type a question or “Speak”; read the answer or have it read aloud with “Voice on” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The conversation with the tutor: its first question, the input field, “Speak” and “Voice on”.
    The conversation with the tutor: its first question, the input field, “Speak” and “Voice on”.

    Fig. 2 The conversation with the tutor: its first question, the input field, “Speak” and “Voice on”.

  4. 4“Explain my progress to me” asks the tutor where you stand and what you should deepen.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: KI-Tutor

The learning curve#

The tutor recognises gaps in understanding during the conversation and gives tips. Next to the chat a learning curve grows — it shows how understanding develops over the course of the conversation.

Tips#

  • The tutor sticks to the topic of the course. The AI guardrails fend off attempts to get it out of its role or to query internals.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?werkzeug=tutor

Role play

liveStudentsTeaching staff

A conversation exercise with an AI figure on the slide — with an assessment at the end.

Why#

Communication is learned in conversation: a customer conversation, a negotiation, a staff appraisal. The figure plays the other side, the assessment shows what went well.

How it works#

Click pathCourseSlide with role playStart conversation

  1. 1In the workshop the author creates a role play on a slide (role, goal, assessment criteria).
  2. 2In the course the invitation to the conversation appears on this slide.
  3. 3On the slide choose “Practise role play: …”. The window shows the conversation partner, the situation and your own goal.
  4. 4Type and send answers; at the top you see how many exchanges remain.
  5. 5“End and assess”: 0 to 3 points per criterion with a justification and an overall score in percent; “Again” starts over.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Rollenspiel

What a role play consists of#

  • Conversation partner — whom the AI figure plays.
  • Situation — the setting of the conversation.
  • Goal — what you yourself should achieve.
  • Criteria — what the assessment measures against; each with 0 to 3 points.
  • A limited number of exchanges — as in a real conversation.

Export from the player

liveStudents

Download flashcards, quiz, mind map and podcast text as a PDF or presentation file — in the institution's corporate design.

Why#

Learning material to take away, print and pass on.

How it works#

Click pathCourseToolExport

  1. 1In the respective tool (e.g. flashcards) choose export.
  2. 2Choose the format: PDF for everything, presentation file for flashcards and mind map (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 A finished mind map; below it the buttons for taking it away as a PDF and as a presentation file.
    A finished mind map; below it the buttons for taking it away as a PDF and as a presentation file.

    Fig. 1 A finished mind map; below it the buttons for taking it away as a PDF and as a presentation file.

  3. 3The file carries the institution's logo, colours and footer.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: Lernwerkzeuge

Which tool supports which format#

  • Flashcards — PDF and presentation file.
  • Mind map — PDF and presentation file.
  • Pocket quiz — PDF.
  • Podcast — the transcript as a PDF.

Logo, colours and footer come from the tenant's corporate design.

Mastery (learning progress)

liveStudents

An overview per course: how ready you are for the exam, how confident per knowledge area and which misconceptions are still open.

Why#

Learning needs a goal and honest feedback. Mastery shows where you stand — from the same data the avatar uses when answering.

How it works#

Click pathDashboardLearning progress

  1. 1In the dashboard open the tab “Learning progress”.
  2. 2At the top three key figures: exam readiness, strong areas, to deepen (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The three key figures: exam readiness in percent, strong areas and areas to deepen.
    The three key figures: exam readiness in percent, strong areas and areas to deepen.

    Fig. 1 The three key figures: exam readiness in percent, strong areas and areas to deepen.

  3. 3Below that, per module, the knowledge areas as bars with confidence and number of answers (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 A module with its knowledge areas as bars, confidence and number of answers.
    A module with its knowledge areas as bars, confidence and number of answers.

    Fig. 2 A module with its knowledge areas as bars, confidence and number of answers.

  4. 4“Open misunderstandings” and “Explain it back to me — history” show what you should still work on (Fig. 3).
    Fig. 3 “Open misunderstandings”: what was noticed while answering and should still be clarified.
    “Open misunderstandings”: what was noticed while answering and should still be clarified.

    Fig. 3 “Open misunderstandings”: what was noticed while answering and should still be clarified.

  5. 5If you are close, the page offers “To the exam”.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Lernwerkzeuge

The key figures#

The bars adjust continuously: slides, quiz answers, questions and identified misconceptions all feed in — the more you ask and answer, the more precise.

  • Exam readiness — “Ready for the exam”, “More practice recommended” or “Still significant gaps”.
  • Strong areas — knowledge areas with at least 70 percent.
  • To deepen — areas below 40 percent.

Mastery and competence profile#

Mastery measures how confident you are with the material. If the competence diagnosis is switched on, the competence profile appears next to it — separately: what you have shown in tasks from practice. A slide that has been read never counts as a competence there.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Your own trial student is created automatically — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Fdashboard%2Fmastery

ECTS overview

liveStudents

Credit points, exam dates, mock exams and recognition in the dashboard.

Why#

Whoever studies wants to know how many credit points they have, what is still missing and when the next exam is due.

How it works#

Click pathDashboardECTS

  1. 1In the dashboard open the ECTS area.
  2. 2“Book oral exam”: once you are ready for the exam you can choose a date; booking is unlocked from 60 percent mastery.
  3. 3Practise a “Mock presentation” and compare all runs under “Mock presentations — history” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 An application for recognition: submitted achievements with ECTS, level, grade and proof, below them the status of the review.
    An application for recognition: submitted achievements with ECTS, level, grade and proof, below them the status of the review.

    Fig. 1 An application for recognition: submitted achievements with ECTS, level, grade and proof, below them the status of the review.

  4. 4The campus shows recognition of previously completed achievements under “Recognition & Credentials”.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Prüfungen

Mock presentation and history#

Every run of a mock presentation is evaluated — among other things speaking rate in words per minute and filler words — and classified as “exam-ready”, “almost exam-ready” or “not yet exam-ready”. The history shows the runs side by side so that progress becomes visible.

Where the points are listed#

The ECTS account with the grade average (weighted by ECTS) and all assessed achievements is in the achievement archive; the final transcript is also there to view and verify.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/anerkennung

Explainer video (short clip)

in progressStudentsTeaching staff

In the learning workshop, generate a short video clip from a course module — billed via a separate video credit.

Why#

Some things are understood faster when you see them. A short clip about a module complements slides and presentation.

How it works#

Click pathLearning workshopLearning toolsFrom a courseExplainer video

  1. 1Open “Learning workshop”, choose “Learning tools” at the top and “From a course” as the source (course and module).
  2. 2In the box “Explainer video (short clip)” click “Generate 8-second clip” — every clip uses eight seconds of credit (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The box “Explainer video (short clip)” with the remaining credit and “Generate 8-second clip”.
    The box “Explainer video (short clip)” with the remaining credit and “Generate 8-second clip”.

    Fig. 1 The box “Explainer video (short clip)” with the remaining credit and “Generate 8-second clip”.

  3. 3Wait until the clip is ready and watch it.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: Lernplattform (always booked)
  • Default: off. The operator switches it on per tenant.
  • The video credit is a separate quota in seconds; when it is used up, the box says so.

Limits today#

  • Only from a course module, not from your own material.
  • A clip is eight seconds long.
  • For trying it out there is a button “Top up credits (demo)” that only simulates the credit.

Under review#

The feature catalogue describes the switch as “Explainer video before the course start”; in the code it switches the clip generator of the learning workshop. A video before the first course start cannot be found in the code. The clip does not yet exist for your own material, and without stored access to the video service the box reports that it is not yet set up.

Dashboard tour

liveStudents

A guided tour on the first visit to the dashboard that shows the most important places.

Why#

The first impression decides whether someone comes back. In a few steps the tour shows where courses, progress and help are.

How it works#

Click pathDashboard (first visit)

  1. 1When the dashboard is opened for the first time, the tour starts on its own.
  2. 2Go through the stations with “Next” or end at any time (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 A station of the tour: progress bar, explanation and “Next”.
    A station of the tour: progress bar, explanation and “Next”.

    Fig. 1 A station of the tour: progress bar, explanation and “Next”.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Lernplattform (always booked)

Using the tour#

  • At the top you see which station you are at (“2 / 5”).
  • “Next” goes to the next station, “Let's go” ends the last one.
  • “Skip” ends the tour immediately; on this device it will not start on its own again afterwards.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Your own trial student is created automatically — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Fdashboard

Interactive learning

liveStudents

Type in a topic, the AI builds a lesson with a sequence of steps from it — and you play through it.

Why#

Not every subject is covered by a finished course. Here you learn self-directed what you need right now and keep your progress per lesson.

How it works#

Click pathCampusStudiesLearn interactively

  1. 1In the campus open “Studies” → “Learn interactively”.
  2. 2Write a topic in the field “Explain to me …” (e.g. “How does a neural network work?”) and “Build lesson” — or tap one of the suggestions (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The field “Explain to me …” with “Build lesson” and the suggestions below it.
    The field “Explain to me …” with “Build lesson” and the suggestions below it.

    Fig. 1 The field “Explain to me …” with “Build lesson” and the suggestions below it.

  3. 3Play through the lesson step by step: try things out, immediate feedback, onwards. No video, no lecture.
  4. 4“Your lessons” lists all your lessons with progress; “mastered” means: everything right the first time (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “Your lessons”: every lesson of your own with progress and the note “mastered”.
    “Your lessons”: every lesson of your own with progress and the note “mastered”.

    Fig. 2 “Your lessons”: every lesson of your own with progress and the note “mastered”.

  5. 5“Show profile” analyses strengths and what you should work on and suggests next topics.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Interaktives Lernen

Streak, records and assignments#

  • Streak — days in a row with a completed lesson.
  • Mastered — lessons you solved completely correctly the first time.
  • Learning records — for completed lessons with number and date of issue, verifiable via a dedicated verification page.
  • Assigned to you — lessons that someone else has assigned. Whoever has built lessons can assign them to others by email address (with a note) and sees their progress.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Your own trial student is created automatically — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Finteraktiv

Fellow learner's question on the slide

liveStudents

In the middle of the slide a voice from the group asks a question — as in a lecture hall.

Why#

Other people's questions lead to thoughts you did not have yourself and break up a long presentation.

How it works#

Click pathCourseBottom barSomeone asks a question

  1. 1If the feature is on, a fellow learner interrupts at suitable points with a question.
  2. 2The avatar answers it, then the presentation continues.
  3. 3In the bar at the bottom “Someone asks a question” can be switched on and off (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The bar below the slide with the switch “Someone asks a question” (on or off).
    The bar below the slide with the switch “Someone asks a question” (on or off).

    Fig. 1 The bar below the slide with the switch “Someone asks a question” (on or off).

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: Interaktives Lernen
  • Default: off. Can be switched on per tenant.

How the question comes#

If “Someone asks a question” is on, a fellow learner now and then speaks up at the end of a slide: a hand goes up, the person is called on, asks the question, the presenter answers. The person is an AI figure — the question is typical of what would be asked at this point in a lecture hall.

Further languages

liveStudentsTeaching staffAdministration

The interface in fifteen languages and a language switcher for every user — plus subtitles and presentation in the chosen language.

Why#

The content speaks the learners' language, and so does the interface: German, English, French, Italian, Spanish, Polish, Swedish, Chinese, Ukrainian, Dutch, Russian, Japanese, Arabic, Hebrew and Hindi.

How it works#

Click pathHeaderGlobeLanguage

  1. 1Click the globe at the top right.
  2. 2Choose a language — the interface switches immediately, the choice is saved (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The open language menu: all languages of the interface, each in its own script.
    The open language menu: all languages of the interface, each in its own script.

    Fig. 1 The open language menu: all languages of the interface, each in its own script.

  3. 3In the course choose the presentation language at the avatar (button with the language code).

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Mehrsprachigkeit
  • Off: only the institution's language, no switcher.

Three levels of language#

  • Interface — menus, buttons and notices; the choice applies to the whole account.
  • Presentation — the language in which the avatar speaks; selectable per course at the avatar, as far as the author has released the language.
  • Subtitles — can be switched on at the speaker bubble.

Lecturers can define course texts in their language themselves; this manual work takes precedence over machine translation.

Tips#

  • Arabic and Hebrew run from right to left; the interface is then mirrored.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo

Learning workshop

liveStudentsTeaching staff

Generate study material from a course or your own material: study guide, flashcards, quiz, mind map, infographic, podcast, study plan and more.

Why#

A script, lecture notes, a specialist article — the learning workshop turns them into material for practising without anyone having to build it by hand.

How it works#

Click pathLearning workshopLearning tools

  1. 1Open “Learning workshop” and choose “Learning tools” at the top.
  2. 2Choose a source: “From a course” (select course and module) or “Own material” (upload a file or paste text).
  3. 3Choose a tile: study guide, flashcards, quiz, mind map, infographic, podcast, study plan, exam simulation, common mistakes, comparison table or practice transfer (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The eleven learning formats as tiles — from the study guide to the practice transfer, each with one sentence of explanation.
    The eleven learning formats as tiles — from the study guide to the practice transfer, each with one sentence of explanation.

    Fig. 1 The eleven learning formats as tiles — from the study guide to the practice transfer, each with one sentence of explanation.

  4. 4View the result, practise or download it (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 A finished result: flashcards from the chosen module, with download.
    A finished result: flashcards from the chosen module, with download.

    Fig. 2 A finished result: flashcards from the chosen module, with download.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: LernWerkstatt
  • Usage (text models, speech output, images) is booked to the workshop credit.

The eleven learning formats#

  • Study guide — the material as a structured learning summary.
  • Flashcards
  • Quiz
  • Mind map
  • Infographic
  • Podcast — as a conversation to listen to.
  • Study plan — repetitions spread over several days.
  • Exam simulation
  • Common mistakes — typical stumbling blocks of the topic.
  • Comparison table
  • Practice transfer — how to apply what you have learned.

Generated results can be saved and opened again later.

Tips#

  • The study plan spreads the repetitions over several days — so that you repeat shortly before forgetting.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

A trial access is created automatically and disappears after a day — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?ziel=%2Fwerkstatt

Competence diagnosis (competence check)

in progressStudentsTeaching staff

What can the learner already do, what is this assessment based on, what is still missing — and how does the course help in a targeted way? With tasks from practice, evidence per criterion and reassessment.

Why#

Slides that have been read are not competence. The diagnosis checks in conversation whether someone can also apply knowledge, finds the specific gap, suggests a targeted learning step and then checks again with a new task.

How it works#

Click pathCourseCourse overviewYour competences

  1. 1Open the course overview. If the competence check is switched on for the course, the invitation “What can you already do? Let's find out together where you stand.” appears at the top — “Start check” or “Skip”.
  2. 2Below it, under “Your competences”, three tiles: “My competence check”, “My competence profile” and “My next learning step”.
  3. 3In the check: for each competence (“Competence 1 of 5”) first a comprehension question, a follow-up question if needed, then a task from practice. Type answers or “Speak answer”, check the transcript and “Submit answer”.
  4. 4After every answer: “That was good” and “You can work on this”. At the end “Check completed” and the route “To the competence profile”.
  5. 5In the profile read, for each competence, the level, the justification, what is still missing and the learning need per criterion; “Continue learning” or “Reassess”.
  6. 6“My next learning step” takes you with one click to the right place in the course — afterwards “Reassess” with a new task.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: Kompetenzcheck
  • Per tenant via the feature “Competence check (CIE)” (default off) or the bookable module “Competence check” — and additionally switchable per course.
  • Built; active only once the database changes have been applied. Until then the administration pages report that the competence check is not yet set up on this installation.
  • Off means unchanged: no tiles, the competence pages answer with “not found”, player and learning progress stay as before.
  • The assessment uses the same text model that the tenant has enabled for the workshop; every call is booked in the usage.

What a competence is here#

A competence is an observable ability — not a chapter and not a lesson that has been read. Not “knows the risks of generative AI”, but “can identify relevant risks in a specific business application, justify their impact and select appropriate countermeasures”.

Every competence has a learning outcome (“What this means in concrete terms”), an expected level, assigned course content, suitable tasks and an assessment rubric with criteria. Definition and rubric carry a version.

  • Level 1 — Understanding
  • Level 2 — Applying
  • Level 3 — Analysing and deciding
  • Level 4 — Independent problem solving

The levels are an internal didactic order, not qualification levels. Consumed content never makes a competence “proven”.

The competence check step by step#

  • Header: the badge of the mode, “Competence n of m”, the current competence and the figure of the course. “Read question aloud” speaks the question with the course voice.
  • Comprehension question — a short starting question.
  • Follow-up question — adaptive: it builds on your own answer and targets the weakest criterion. It never counts as evidence of its own.
  • Task from practice — a case study, a decision with justification, an error analysis, a transfer to a changed situation or an open problem. At least one per competence.
  • Speak answer: the transcript appears in the field with the note to check and correct it before submitting. Without a microphone you type.
  • “Pause” and later “Resume”: the check picks up again at the task that was set.
  • An answer that cannot be evaluated “does not count against you”.

Learning mode and assessment mode#

The check starts in assessment mode: the answer is assessed; help is only available for understanding the question (“Question about the task”), not for the solution.

“Switch to learning mode” allows explanations, tips and examples. The current task then counts as practice, not as evidence — even if you switch “Back to assessment mode” afterwards.

The mode is always visible as a badge above the task. The switch is logged.

How assessment works#

  • 0 to 3 points per criterion: 0 not met or serious error, 1 partially, 2 largely, 3 completely — each criterion with a justification, not by overall impression.
  • The rubric is fixed before answering and is never adjusted afterwards.
  • High scores need a verbatim quote from the answer; without it the score is reduced to 1 — visibly.
  • “Demonstrated” needs at least two independent pieces of evidence that were met, one of them from practice.
  • If pieces of evidence of the same kind clearly contradict each other, nothing is averaged: the level is “Still unclear”, and a further task clarifies it.
  • Eloquence, length, self-description or the model's confidence are not evidence.

The level of a competence#

  • Not assessed — no answers yet. That is never a gap.
  • Learning need identified — for example “Something essential was still missing in the practice task.”
  • Developing — partially shown, or proof is still missing.
  • Demonstrated — “Shown in several independent tasks, including in practice.”
  • Still unclear — contradictory evidence.

If a piece of evidence is waiting for review by a teacher, this is indicated. Percentages are deliberately not given — no spurious precision.

My competence profile#

For each competence: name, level, a short justification, “What this means in concrete terms”, “Still missing” (e.g. a practice task, further proof, a clarifying task, review by a teacher) and the learning need per criterion with the justification of the assessment.

“Download evidence (JSON)” gives a structured, verifiable file of your own evidence — not a certificate.

In the dashboard's learning progress the competence profile appears as a separate section next to mastery.

My next learning step#

Three blocks: “This is what you can already do.”, “This is where you still need to learn.”, “This is what we recommend next.” A click on “Start now” opens the course at the right slide with the right method; above the slide it then says what is being practised specifically. “Or rather:” offers alternatives.

The recommendation only comes when there is a reason — not automatically after every module. Competences already demonstrated are not taught again.

  • Basics missing → view slide, view explanation or example
  • Misconception → Ask me (Socratic) focused on the gap, otherwise explanation or slide
  • Application uncertain → view example, then guided exercise
  • Justification weak → Explain it back to me or Socratic
  • Problem solving missing → guided exercise (multi-step decision)
  • Unclear evidence → do not teach, reassess instead

Reassess#

After a learning step, “Afterwards: reassess” leads to a new, equivalent task for the same competence in a different context — never to the same task. The level results only from the new evidence; progress is only shown when it is supported. Original performance, learning step and new evidence are compared and recorded.

For those responsible for courses: maintaining competences#

  • Workshop course: in the phase “Content” the tab “Competences” (only when the feature is switched on). At the top the switch “Competence check in this course”.
  • “Suggest competences from the slides” — the suggestions appear with the status “Suggestion” and the origin “AI suggestion”.
  • For each competence: criteria of the rubric (type: knowledge, application, justification, analysis, problem solving; key criteria marked), assigned content (a missing slide is marked) and sample tasks.
  • “Edit rubric” → “Save as new version”: the changed rubric needs a new approval; previous assessments remain unchanged.
  • “Approve” makes a competence effective, “Withdraw” takes it out.
  • Lecturers switch file courses in the lecturer area under “Competences”; the review list of disputed assessments is there too.

Limits — honestly#

  • A tool for individual learning support. It claims no diagnostic validity: rubric points are not measurements, the level is a comprehensible assessment from evidence, not a certificate.
  • No certificate, no QR verification, no ranking, no use for personnel decisions, no passing on to superiors. The competency matrix of people development is deliberately not connected.
  • The assessment per criterion is made by a language model. The form is safeguarded (exactly the criteria, 0–3, quote, repetition on errors, “not assessable” instead of guessing); wrong judgements on content within a valid form are possible — hence two pieces of evidence, review list and correction with a log.
  • Very short, correct answers can be scored lower because of the quote rule; this is shown visibly.
  • Attempts to give the assessment instructions are detected by a narrow pattern recognition (German and English) plus the model; they only lead to review by a person, never to penalty points.
  • The content of the pilot course is German; answers in other languages are assessed.
  • A draft in the answer field is not saved — only submitted answers.
  • The invitation speaks of a few minutes; a check across all five competences of the pilot rather takes 15 to 25 minutes.
  • Accounts without an institution get no competence check — all data hangs on a tenant. Several runs of the same course share the competence level.

The pilot course “AI competence”#

For each competence there is at least one comprehension task and one independent application task. The pilot is a small course of its own; existing courses remain unchanged.

  • Basic understanding of generative AI
  • Assessing AI-generated information
  • Safe use at work
  • Selecting suitable use cases
  • Critical review of AI-supported decisions

Tips#

  • No permanently visible buttons are added to the player. The competence diagnosis lives on the course overview; only a learning step leads into the player.
  • AI may suggest competences from the slides; they only take effect after approval by those responsible for the course.
  • A single competence can be checked specifically — from the profile with “Check now” or “Reassess”.

Under review#

The database changes have not yet been applied and acceptance with real models is pending; the interface has therefore not yet been clicked through against a real database. Open subject-matter questions (thresholds, number of pieces of evidence, retention period of the answers) are awaiting a decision.

Chapter 2

Teaching

The workplace of lecturers: cohorts, papers and reviews, office hours and the academic guideline against which work is checked.

Lecturer area

liveTeaching staff

The lecturers' home page: lead classes, maintain course texts in every language, set exams, assess papers, grade projects, maintain your profile.

Why#

Build a course, set an exam, assess — and lead your own classes without opening five different systems.

How it works#

Click pathLecturerLecturers' home page

  1. 1Sign in as a lecturer and open “Lecturer”; the home page greets you with “Welcome, …”.
  2. 2Choose one of the tiles: “Classes”, “Course texts in your language”, “Learning workshop”, “Exam creation” or “Submitted papers” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The tiles of the home page: Classes, Course texts in your language, Learning workshop, Exam creation and Submitted papers.
    The tiles of the home page: Classes, Course texts in your language, Learning workshop, Exam creation and Submitted papers.

    Fig. 1 The tiles of the home page: Classes, Course texts in your language, Learning workshop, Exam creation and Submitted papers.

  3. 3If the competence check is switched on for the institution, the tile “Competences” is added.
  4. 4Use the bar at the top to switch to “Profile & topics”, “Projects & assessment”, “Office hours” and “Fees”.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Dozentenbereich
  • Off: the whole lecturer area is missing — including the office hours that sit below it.
  • The bar additionally shows “Studio” if the course workshop is switched on for the institution.

The tiles of the home page#

  • Classes — create classes, invite students, see progress.
  • Course texts in your language — word slides, quiz and exam questions yourself, in every language offered.
  • Learning workshop — build a course from your own material (slides, narration, quiz).
  • Exam creation — create multiple-choice questions, a written exam or paper topics.
  • Submitted papers — read and assess students' submissions, maintain your own sources.
  • Competences — switch the competence check per course, review disputed assessments (only when switched on).

Previously the workshop, exam creation and papers were reachable for lecturers but linked nowhere. The tiles make them findable — a feature you cannot find does not exist.

The bar in the lecturer area#

Whoever comes via the campus demo sees the campus navigation instead; the pages behind it are the same.

  • Profile & topics
  • Projects & assessment
  • Office hours
  • Fees
  • Studio (if the workshop is switched on)

Tips#

  • Whoever owns a course in the workshop also gets into class management without the lecturer role — so every author can lead a cohort on their own course.
  • Every page of the area checks the permission again itself; a link typed in directly does not get you in without the lecturer role.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Opens the demo role with fictitious sample data — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/enter?persona=karl&next=%2Fdozent

Classes (cohorts)

liveTeaching staff

A class bundles students on a course: invite by email, manage open invitations, see progress per person.

Why#

Lecturers want to know who is in their course and how far they have got — without typing up lists and without writing to everyone individually.

How it works#

Click pathLecturerClassesNew class

  1. 1In the lecturer area open the tile “Classes” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The lecturer's classes as cards: name, course, institution and number of students.
    The lecturer's classes as cards: name, course, institution and number of students.

    Fig. 1 The lecturer's classes as cards: name, course, institution and number of students.

  2. 2Choose “New class”: enter a name (e.g. “Business Administration Semester 2026-S1”), course and optionally university or institute, then create it.
  3. 3Open the class and, on the left under “Invite”, paste email addresses — separated by comma, space or line break — and “Send invitations” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “Invite” in a class: the field for email addresses and “Send invitations”, below it the open invitations.
    “Invite” in a class: the field for email addresses and “Send invitations”, below it the open invitations.

    Fig. 2 “Invite” in a class: the field for email addresses and “Send invitations”, below it the open invitations.

  4. 4Under “Open invitations” you can copy the invitation link or revoke the invitation for each address.
  5. 5On the right are the students of the class with progress bars (completed modules out of all) and the status “Active” or “Completed” (Fig. 3).
    Fig. 3 The students of a class with progress bars and the status “Active” or “Completed”.
    The students of a class with progress bars and the status “Active” or “Completed”.

    Fig. 3 The students of a class with progress bars and the status “Active” or “Completed”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

What the list shows#

  • Header: name of the class, course, university and the number of students.
  • Per person: name or email address, progress bar “n/m” modules, status “Active” or “Completed”.
  • Open invitations: address, copy link, revoke.

Tips#

  • If there is no assignable course yet, the page says so: first create a course in the workshop or have an Academy course enabled.
  • Invited people appear in the list as soon as they have created their account — before that they are listed under “Open invitations”.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Opens the demo role with fictitious sample data — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/enter?persona=karl&next=%2Fdozent%2Fcohorts

Course texts in your own language

liveTeaching staffAdministration

Word a course's slide texts, quiz questions and exam questions yourself — in the language in which you teach. Manual work takes precedence over machine translation.

Why#

Machine translation does not always get specialist language right. Whoever teaches in a language should be able to define their texts there themselves — and they should not disappear again with the next translation round.

How it works#

Click pathLecturerCourse texts in your language

  1. 1In the lecturer area open “Course texts in your language”.
  2. 2Choose a course at the top; the courses of your own institution appear, including the published courses from the workshop.
  3. 3Choose the area: “Slides”, “Quiz questions” or “Exam questions”. For courses from the workshop only the slides are available here.
  4. 4For slides and quiz questions choose a module; exam questions apply to the whole course.
  5. 5Choose the language, edit the texts and save (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 On the left the texts of the chosen area, on the right the chosen text in the target language for editing and saving.
    On the left the texts of the chosen area, on the right the chosen text in the target language for editing and saving.

    Fig. 1 On the left the texts of the chosen area, on the right the chosen text in the target language for editing and saving.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

When nothing appears#

  • “No final exam is stored for this course.” — there is no question pool for the exam.
  • “No quiz is stored for this module.” — the module has no quiz questions.
  • “This module has no slides with text.” — for example pure image slides.

Tips#

  • What is entered here applies — even after the next round of machine translation. The other languages are updated in the background without overwriting other lecturers' manual work.
  • The surface is reserved for lecturers and the administration: whoever can write course text can also write exam questions.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Opens the demo role with fictitious sample data — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/enter?persona=karl&next=%2Fdozent%2Ftexte

Projects & assessment

liveTeaching staff

Assess project submissions of portfolio modules with a percentage and a comment — the overall grade is recalculated on saving.

Why#

In portfolio modules the project makes up half of the grade. The assessment belongs in a place where the overall grade is right immediately.

How it works#

Click pathLecturerProjects & assessment

  1. 1In the lecturer area open “Projects & assessment” in the bar.
  2. 2For each submission view the file and enter a percentage and a comment.
  3. 3Save: the participant's overall grade is recalculated automatically.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

How the portfolio grade is formed#

A portfolio module is not assessed by a written exam but by several parts. The project submission is one of them and counts for half. When a project assessment is saved, the platform recalculates the participant's overall grade — nobody has to enter it by hand.

Tips#

  • The project counts for 50 percent of the portfolio grade; participants see the gradebook and the discussion on the course page under “Achievements & participation”.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Opens the demo role with fictitious sample data — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/enter?persona=karl&next=%2Fdozent%2Fprojects

Profile & topics for theses

liveTeaching staffStudents

Your own lecturer profile with title, CV, publications and office hours — and advertised topics for theses.

Why#

Students look for supervision for their theses. A well-maintained profile with open topics saves circular emails and shows who can be approached for what.

How it works#

Click pathLecturerProfile & topics

  1. 1In the lecturer area open “Profile & topics” in the bar.
  2. 2Fill in title, website, “About me”, publications (one per line), office hours (e.g. “Tue 2–4 pm, by appointment”) and “Available for” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The lecturer's profile: title, website, “About me”, publications, office hours and “Available for”.
    The lecturer's profile: title, website, “About me”, publications, office hours and “Available for”.

    Fig. 1 The lecturer's profile: title, website, “About me”, publications, office hours and “Available for”.

  3. 3Tick “Visible in the lecturer directory” if the profile should be listed publicly in the directory, and “Save profile”.
  4. 4Under “Topics for theses” advertise a topic with an optional short description; students see open topics in the directory (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 Advertised topics for theses with type and short description.
    Advertised topics for theses with type and short description.

    Fig. 2 Advertised topics for theses with type and short description.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The fields of the profile#

  • Title (e.g. “Prof. Dr.”) and website.
  • About me.
  • Publications — one per line.
  • Office hours — as text, e.g. “Tue 2–4 pm, by appointment”; bookable slots come from “Office hours”.
  • Available for — what you can be approached for as a supervisor.
  • Visible in the lecturer directory — yes or no.

Tips#

  • An advertised topic can be deleted again at any time; only visible profiles appear in the directory.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Opens the demo role with fictitious sample data — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/enter?persona=karl&next=%2Fdozent%2Fprofil

Office hours

liveTeaching staffStudents

Lecturers release slots, students book them themselves — and both see their bookings in one place.

Why#

No email ping-pong over an appointment: free slots are listed, one click books.

How it works#

Click pathDashboardOffice hour

  1. 1Lecturers: in the lecturer area open “Office hours”, enter date and time, duration in minutes and location (default “Online (video call)”) and “Release slot”.
  2. 2Released slots are listed below as “open” or with the name and note of the person who booked; a slot can be deleted (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 A lecturer's released slots — open or with name and note of the person who booked.
    A lecturer's released slots — open or with name and note of the person who booked.

    Fig. 1 A lecturer's released slots — open or with name and note of the person who booked.

  3. 3Students: in the dashboard open “Office hour”; under “Free slots” every slot is listed with lecturer, duration and location (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “Free slots” from the students' point of view: lecturer, time, duration, location and “Book”.
    “Free slots” from the students' point of view: lecturer, time, duration, location and “Book”.

    Fig. 2 “Free slots” from the students' point of view: lecturer, time, duration, location and “Book”.

  4. 4Optionally state what it is about and “Book”.
  5. 5“My appointments” lists your own bookings; “Cancel” releases the slot again.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Dozentenbereich

What a slot carries#

  • Start (date and time)
  • Duration in minutes
  • Location — freely selectable, default “Online (video call)”
  • after booking: who booked and the optional note

Tips#

  • Only the lecturer sees the note made when booking (“What is it about?”) — so they can prepare.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/termine

Checking and reviewing papers

liveTeaching staff

Upload a paper, have quotations and sources checked and receive a review with a grade proposal — the grade is set by a person.

Why#

Checking seminar papers, term papers and theses takes time. The platform takes over what can be checked mechanically and justifies every objection with a rule number from the guideline.

How it works#

Click pathCheck papersOpen paperCheck now

  1. 1Open the page “Check papers” (address /dozent/arbeiten) and upload a paper: title, author identifier, type (seminar paper, term paper, bachelor's thesis, master's thesis, other), date the topic was issued, assessment round, length according to the module description, deviating supervision agreement, file.
  2. 2“Upload and read” — the paper then appears in the list as “read, not yet checked” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Recently submitted”: the uploaded papers with type, author identifier and status of the check.
    “Recently submitted”: the uploaded papers with type, author identifier and status of the check.

    Fig. 1 “Recently submitted”: the uploaded papers with type, author identifier and status of the check.

  3. 3Open the paper and choose “Check now” (optionally with “Check quotations (takes time)”) — this takes up to two minutes.
  4. 4In the review folder read every finding with its rule number and location and choose “Accept” or “Discard” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The review folder: every finding with rule number, location, “Accept” and “Discard”.
    The review folder: every finding with rule number, location, “Accept” and “Discard”.

    Fig. 2 The review folder: every finding with rule number, location, “Accept” and “Discard”.

  5. 5Under “Assessment” read the machine proposal, choose the grade yourself and “Set grade”; before that the paper can be “submitted to the author for comment” (Fig. 3).
    Fig. 3 “Assessment”: the machine proposal, the examiner's choice of grade and “Set grade”.
    “Assessment”: the machine proposal, the examiner's choice of grade and “Set grade”.

    Fig. 3 “Assessment”: the machine proposal, the examiner's choice of grade and “Set grade”.

  6. 6“Download complete file” — paper, findings, log and the wording of every cited rule in one file.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Why the details at upload matter#

  • Topic issued on — determines which version of the guideline applies (rule 1.2).
  • Assessment round — all papers of a round are checked with the same checking tools (rule 1.3). A new round can be created directly.
  • Length according to the module description (words) — without a target there is no length finding (rule 2.4).
  • Deviating supervision agreement — if the text names a rule number, the objection to it is dropped (rule 1.1).

The states of a paper#

  • read, not yet checked
  • checked, findings open
  • submitted to the author
  • graded — the list then shows “Grade x.x”

What the review folder contains#

Findings with rule, location, objection and source; for each finding the examiner decides “Accept” or “Discard”. Below that “Discarded by the machine”: observations that the check itself dropped because they did not meet the requirements of a rule — they are listed there so that nobody has to claim the system saw nothing.

Plus the check log and a section “What was not assessed by machine”. The examiner's justification is a separate field.

Tips#

  • The grade proposal and the grade are in separate fields; there is deliberately no “Accept proposal” button. A person has to decide (Art. 22 GDPR).
  • There is no AI score for cheating — detectors provide no proof.
  • An image PDF without a text layer is rejected; PDFs with a text layer, DOCX and text are accepted.

Under review#

“Check papers” does not yet have a tile or an item in the bar of the lecturer area; the page is reached via its address or “Try it yourself”. The tile “Submitted papers” leads to submissions from courses, not here.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Opens the demo role with fictitious sample data — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/enter?persona=karl&next=%2Fdozent%2Farbeiten

Academic guideline

liveStudentsTeaching staffAdministration

The rules for academic work against which papers are checked — each with a number and legal basis, public and as a PDF.

Why#

Whoever is assessed should know beforehand by what criteria. Every objection in the review cites a rule from this guideline; a university can store its own set of rules.

How it works#

Click pathGuideline

  1. 1Open “Guideline” — without signing in.
  2. 2At the top is the classification of the checking tool (role, risk class under the AI Act, scope) (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The classification of the checking tool: role, risk class under the AI Act and scope.
    The classification of the checking tool: role, risk class under the AI Act and scope.

    Fig. 1 The classification of the checking tool: role, risk class under the AI Act and scope.

  3. 3The rules are numbered by section; every rule shows whether it can be checked by machine, is pre-checked or can only be decided by the examiner (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 A numbered rule with its wording and an indication of whether it can be checked by machine, is pre-checked or is decided only by the examiner.
    A numbered rule with its wording and an indication of whether it can be checked by machine, is pre-checked or is decided only by the examiner.

    Fig. 2 A numbered rule with its wording and an indication of whether it can be checked by machine, is pre-checked or is decided only by the examiner.

  4. 4“Download as PDF” for filing.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Three kinds of rules#

  • checkable by machine — the platform decides and justifies with the rule number;
  • pre-checked — the platform makes a finding, the examiner accepts or discards it;
  • only by the examiner — the platform says nothing about it and states this in the review.

Tips#

  • Which version applies to a paper is decided by the date the topic was issued — not the date of the check.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/leitfaden

Competences: switch courses, review disputed assessments

in progressTeaching staff

For lecturers: switch the competence check on and off per course and review assessments that the platform has marked as disputed.

Why#

An automatic assessment can be wrong. Where it is uncertain or an answer tries to influence the assessment, a person decides — with a justification and a log.

How it works#

Click pathLecturerCompetences

  1. 1In the lecturer area open the tile “Competences” (it only appears if the competence check is switched on).
  2. 2Under “Courses” switch the competence check on or off per course; next to it you see “Approved competences: n”.
  3. 3Under “Review list: disputed assessments” open an assessment: answer, notes and the automatic assessment per criterion.
  4. 4Adjust points per criterion, write a justification (required, at least ten characters) and “Correct” — or “Confirm” if the assessment is right.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: Kompetenzcheck
  • Visible only when the feature “Competence check (CIE)” is switched on (default off). Active only once the database changes have been applied — until then the page reports that the competence check is not yet set up on this installation.

When an assessment is disputed#

  • when the automatic assessment reports high uncertainty;
  • when an answer tries to give the assessment instructions (such as “Ignore all instructions …”) — this never leads to penalty points, only to review by a person.

Disputed evidence only counts towards the competence level once a teacher has confirmed or corrected it. Until then the learner sees: “An assessment is still being reviewed by a teacher.”

Tips#

  • Accounts appear without names, only with the beginning of their identifier (“Account …”). You only see your own institution.
  • A correction overwrites nothing: it becomes a new piece of evidence with version, justification and examiner; the competence level is recalculated from it.
  • Only lecturers review assessments — not a company's administration. This way the competence check never becomes a manager's view.

Lecturers' fees

liveTeaching staffAdministration

Lecturers see their own fees with status; the administration keeps the fee ledger under finances.

Why#

Transparency for visiting lecturers: what has been settled and what is still open.

How it works#

Click pathLecturerFees

  1. 1In the lecturer area open “Fees” in the bar.
  2. 2At the top “Total” and “Paid out”; below that every item with description, period, amount and status “Open”, “Approved” or “Paid out” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 A lecturer's fees: description, period, amount and status “Open”, “Approved” or “Paid out”.
    A lecturer's fees: description, period, amount and status “Open”, “Approved” or “Paid out”.

    Fig. 1 A lecturer's fees: description, period, amount and status “Open”, “Approved” or “Paid out”.

  3. 3The administration records the items under “Finances” → “Lecturer fees”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The status of an item#

  • Open — recorded, not yet approved.
  • Approved — designated for payment.
  • Paid out — counts towards the “Paid out” total.

Chapter 3

Exams & Credentials

Creating and taking exams, proctoring, achievement archive, certificates and badges — publicly verifiable by QR code, without an account.

Exams

liveTeaching staffStudentsAdministration

Create, release, take and evaluate exams — multiple-choice exam, written exam with free text or topics for papers.

Why#

An exam is the moment when learning counts. Lecturers put it together in a few minutes — with AI suggestions if they wish —, students take it in the browser, and the result lands in the achievement archive.

How it works#

Click pathLecturerExam creationNew exam

  1. 1Lecturers: open “Exam creation” and create a “New exam”; choose the type (multiple-choice exam, written exam, paper topics) (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Exam creation”: the created exams with type, course, number of questions and release status.
    “Exam creation”: the created exams with type, course, number of questions and release status.

    Fig. 1 “Exam creation”: the created exams with type, course, number of questions and release status.

  2. 2Write questions or have them generated from a topic under “Generate with AI” — the suggestions are appended, nothing is overwritten (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The editor of an exam: multiple-choice and free-text questions with answers, correct solution and assessment grid.
    The editor of an exam: multiple-choice and free-text questions with answers, correct solution and assessment grid.

    Fig. 2 The editor of an exam: multiple-choice and free-text questions with answers, correct solution and assessment grid.

  3. 3For free-text questions, store an assessment grid; it steers the AI pre-marking.
  4. 4Release: for a class in the course or via a link (guests enter their name, signed-in users take it under their account).
  5. 5Students: open “Exams” in the dashboard and take the exam; with proctoring, agree to the declaration first.
  6. 6View the results per exam; a shared link can be revoked at any time.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Prüfungen
  • The module “Exams” comprises exams, achievement archive and ECTS overview.

Three types of exam#

  • Multiple-choice exam: questions with several answers, can be evaluated immediately.
  • Written exam: free-text questions with an assessment grid; the AI suggests an assessment, the release lies with the teacher.
  • Paper topics: issue topics; the submitted paper goes through the review check.

From draft to archive#

An exam is created as a draft, released and taken. Results flow into the student's achievement archive (grade, credit points). Passed exams produce exam certificates that can be verified publicly under an unguessable code.

In the campus, “Assessment rethought” shows what an exam without pure recall can look like; objecting to an assessment has its own procedure (“Objection procedure”).

Who may do what#

  • Lecturers create and assess their own exams.
  • The examinations office (administration) sees the exams and proctoring incidents of its own university and releases transcripts — never those of another.
  • Students only see their own attempts and results.

Tips#

  • The AI suggestion for a free-text assessment is a suggestion. A person confirms the assessment.
  • A revoked exam link shows guests a friendly refusal instead of an error.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Opens the demo role with fictitious sample data — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/enter?persona=karl&next=%2Fpruefungen

Proctoring in exams

liveStudentsAdministration

Camera and behaviour monitoring during an online exam — what is recorded and why is stated openly beforehand; incidents are always reviewed by a person, never by a machine.

Why#

A certificate is only worth as much as the exam behind it. Proctoring shows that the person was examined themselves — with as little data as possible and without an automatic verdict.

How it works#

Click pathStart examTransparency noticeAgree

  1. 1Before the exam, “Before the exam — what we record and why.” appears with the three points webcam images, tab switches and full screen, plus storage, access and “Your right” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The students' view: consent and identity check, each with its status.
    The students' view: consent and identity check, each with its status.

    Fig. 1 The students' view: consent and identity check, each with its status.

  2. 2“Agree — start exam →” or “Rather not now”.
  3. 3Identity check: “A photo as proof.” — look into the camera, “Take photo”, if necessary “Again”, then “Confirm photo”. The image is linked to the certificate, not public.
  4. 4During the exam: photos at intervals, switching to another tab or window is noted; the stricter level adds mandatory full screen, copy lock and face detection (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 A proctored session: integrity score as a triage hint, the incident timeline and the human review under the four-eyes principle.
    A proctored session: integrity score as a triage hint, the incident timeline and the human review under the four-eyes principle.

    Fig. 2 A proctored session: integrity score as a triage hint, the incident timeline and the human review under the four-eyes principle.

  5. 5The administration opens “Proctoring”: the last 200 events of all exams and above them “For review” — transcripts with incidents that await a decision.
  6. 6For each transcript “Release” or “Hold back”, always with a justification (at least 10 characters); the student may read it later.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Prüfungsaufsicht
  • Off: no consent, no camera — for every course of this tenant.
  • There are three levels per exam session: without proctoring, light (photos and focus changes) and strict (additionally full screen, copy lock, face detection, pause after three violations).
  • The module “Exam proctoring” requires the module “Exams”.

What is noted#

“Face mismatch” and “Unknown voice” are planned but not yet active: no exam surface reports them so far. The proctoring page explicitly marks both as “Not yet active”.

  • Tab switch and leaving the window
  • Leaving full screen (strict level)
  • Attempt to copy or paste (strict level)
  • Several faces or no face (twice in a row) — strict level, checked every minute
  • Camera photo — every five minutes

Every event has a severity: info, warning or critical. Photos are info — they are the material of a review, not its cause.

No incident is judged by a machine#

The platform counts, it does not judge: if there are observations of the level warning or critical, the transcript is issued but does not count as proctored — until a person has looked at it and released it with their name and a justification. If there are none, there is nothing to review.

An automatic assessment of exam behaviour would be a high-risk system under the European AI Act; a counter that calls a person is not. A guard in the code ensures that the release can only arise at these two places.

The page “Proctoring” in the administration#

  • Key figures: events (last 200), warnings, critical, photos
  • “For review” — waiting transcripts with “Release” and “Hold back”
  • “Event stream” — the events with severity; one click opens the session

Who may do what#

The page is opened by a tenant's administration (examinations office) for incidents of its own students — every query is bound to the tenant boundary — and by the operator for all.

Tips#

  • Photos are stored in the EU, kept for 90 days and then deleted automatically. Only the exam board has access, in case of review — no passing on, no evaluation by AI without cause.
  • The identity check can be skipped (“Continue without identity check”); this is then stated on the credential.
  • If the browser cannot detect faces, this is noted — the session then counts as not monitored, not as unremarkable.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/proctoring

Achievement archive & ECTS account

liveStudents

The student's grades, credit points and weighted average, their own final transcript — and the certificates to download.

Why#

Whoever needs a certificate of studies for an authority looks for it where their achievements are listed — not on the application page.

How it works#

Click pathStudiesAchievements

  1. 1In the studies area open “Achievements” (address /studium/leistungen) — “Your ECTS account and all assessed achievements”.
  2. 2If a final transcript has been issued, it is at the very top with degree, programme, transcript number, date and “View and verify transcript”.
  3. 3Three key figures: ECTS account (out of 180, with a bar), grade average (weighted by ECTS) and number of achievements (of which assessed) (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The three key figures: ECTS account with a bar, grade average and number of achievements.
    The three key figures: ECTS account with a bar, grade average and number of achievements.

    Fig. 1 The three key figures: ECTS account with a bar, grade average and number of achievements.

  4. 4Below that every achievement: type, course, title, examiner, grade or “passed”, ECTS or “failed” — or “being assessed”; plus the review, submission and assessment date (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 An assessed achievement: type, course, title, examiner, grade, ECTS and the review with date.
    An assessed achievement: type, course, title, examiner, grade, ECTS and the review with date.

    Fig. 2 An assessed achievement: type, course, title, examiner, grade, ECTS and the review with date.

  5. 5At the bottom the certificates as PDF — depending on the status of the studies.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Prüfungen
  • Part of the module “Exams” (together with examinations office and ECTS overview).

Types of achievements#

  • Written exam
  • Seminar paper
  • Thesis
  • Project work
  • Oral exam
  • Other

Which certificate when#

  • Notice of admission — from admission (admitted, enrolled, active, on leave, graduated).
  • Certificate of enrolment — only during enrolment (enrolled, active, on leave).
  • Certificate of studies — likewise only during enrolment.

The enrolment certificates need a real matriculation number; that is why they are only available after enrolment.

Who may do what#

The student reads their own achievements and their own transcript — the database only lets their own rows through. Entering and assessing: the examinations office via student administration.

Tips#

  • Nobody except the examinations office can write here — the page only reads your own achievements.
  • As long as nothing has been entered, it says: “As soon as the examinations office enters an assessment, it appears here — with grade, ECTS and review.”

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Your own trial student is created automatically — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Fstudium%2Fleistungen

Certificates & transcripts

liveStudentsAdministrationOperator

Tamper-proof certificates and transcripts with a QR code — anyone can verify them without an account.

Why#

An employer should see within seconds whether a credential is genuine, valid and not revoked — without calling the university.

How it works#

Click pathVerify (public)Enter code

  1. 1After passing a course or an exam, the certificate is ready in the dashboard (view, PDF, share).
  2. 2The administration issues final transcripts under “Transcript”: enter name, degree and programme, check the preview, print or save as PDF.
  3. 3Verify: scan the QR code or open “Verify” and enter the code — “valid”, “expired” or “invalid” appears (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Verify credential”: the field for the code and the result “valid”, “expired” or “invalid”.
    “Verify credential”: the field for the code and the result “valid”, “expired” or “invalid”.

    Fig. 1 “Verify credential”: the field for the code and the result “valid”, “expired” or “invalid”.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Zertifikate & Abzeichen

Why a credential cannot be forged#

  • Every credential has an unguessable code; the verification page reads it directly from the institution's database.
  • Final transcripts are additionally issued as a verifiable digital credential following an open standard (Verifiable Credential): signed by the issuing institution, with validity and revocation status. The verification page shows at the top the document as the holder received it and below it the cryptographic verification.
  • If a company issues it (training records of people development, microcredentials), it appears in the credential as the issuing body with name and country; the signature comes from the platform. The verification page shows company and country as soon as the signature has been verified.
  • The PDF is created from the same view that is shown on the verification page — identical image for image.
  • Real prints need a token signed by the server; every print without it carries the watermark MUSTER (sample).

Revocation and expiry#

A credential can be revoked; the verification page shows this immediately. Unknown or revoked codes give a clear negative result, never an error message. A daily run sends a reminder before time-limited credentials expire.

Which credentials exist#

  • Course certificate after passing a course
  • Exam certificate for a passed exam
  • Final transcript of the university (issued by the administration)
  • Training record of people development with a validity date
  • Certificates from the achievement archive

Who may do what#

  • Verify: anyone, without an account — the verification page is public.
  • Issue final transcripts (the administration's “Transcript” page): administration and operator.
  • Course and exam certificates are created automatically after passing; the holder views, prints and shares their own.

Tips#

  • Whoever shares a certificate gets a proper preview with a certificate banner on social networks.
  • Without a valid server signature every print carries the watermark MUSTER (sample) — there is no parameter that switches it off.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/verify

Badges

liveStudentsAdministration

Digital badges that are not awarded but calculated — with the condition in plain text, also for what has not yet been achieved, and the evidence for what has been achieved.

Why#

A badge whose condition you do not know is a gamble, not a goal. And one that remains after a grade correction is wrong — that is why it is recalculated instead of copied.

How it works#

Click pathCampusStudiesMy badges

  1. 1Students: in the campus open “Studies” → “My badges” (address /studium/badges).
  2. 2At the top: “x of y badges” and the ECTS from passed achievements.
  3. 3Badges achieved show “Evidence:” — the achievement they follow from, with date; open ones show “Required:” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “My badges”: achieved badges with “Evidence:” and date, open ones with “Required:”.
    “My badges”: achieved badges with “Evidence:” and date, open ones with “Required:”.

    Fig. 1 “My badges”: achieved badges with “Evidence:” and date, open ones with “Required:”.

  4. 4The administration opens “Badges” (address /admin/badges): “How often achieved” per badge with condition and number of students, below that each student with their badges (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “How often achieved” in the administration: every badge with condition and number of students.
    “How often achieved” in the administration: every badge with condition and number of students.

    Fig. 2 “How often achieved” in the administration: every badge with condition and number of students.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Zertifikate & Abzeichen
  • Part of the module “Certificates & badges”.

The badges and their conditions#

  • First exam passed — at least one passed course exam
  • Three exams passed — at least three passed course exams
  • First academic achievement — at least one assessed and passed achievement in the achievement archive
  • Very good — at least one passed achievement with grade 1.3 or better
  • 30 ECTS and 60 ECTS — from assessed, passed achievements
  • Thesis passed
  • Graduation — an issued final transcript

Who may do what#

  • Students see their own badges.
  • The administration (and the operator) sees who has which badge — read-only: when recalculating, the overview enters no award date for other people's accounts.

Tips#

  • There is deliberately no “Award badge” button: badges follow from passed exams, assessed achievements and the transcript.
  • If a grade is corrected, a badge based on it disappears by itself — both pages recalculate on every visit.
  • None achieved yet? The page refers to the achievement archive.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/badges

Fact check of the content

liveTeaching staffAdministration

Verifiable statements in courses are checked against sources by two models — when new slides are generated and on a schedule across the whole inventory; every case is recorded in a file that cannot be retouched.

Why#

A course that teaches something false does more harm than none. The verification chain holds statements against sources and knows, besides “supported” and “refuted”, also “unverified” — an unreachable server does not become an accusation.

How it works#

Click pathCampusQuality & governanceFact check file

  1. 1When a slide is generated, its verifiable statements are checked before graphics and voice-over are created. If the check finds something, the workshop shows the slide and the narration with highlighting and a suggestion with clickable sources (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 A recorded case: two checkers with their sources, below them the verdict on which statement applies and why.
    A recorded case: two checkers with their sources, below them the verdict on which statement applies and why.

    Fig. 1 A recorded case: two checkers with their sources, below them the verdict on which statement applies and why.

  2. 2The administration opens “Fact check across the inventory” (address /admin/faktenpruefung): “Last run”, “What is in the inventory”, “Register”, “State of development” and the schedule.
  3. 3Schedule: switch “Fact check runs automatically” on or off, “Every how many days?” (30 = once a month), “Objects per night” (a cost brake) and “Not before (UTC)” — then “Save plan”. It applies from the next nightly run (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The fact-check schedule: on or off, interval in days, objects per night and earliest start.
    The fact-check schedule: on or off, interval in days, objects per night and earliest start.

    Fig. 2 The fact-check schedule: on or off, interval in days, objects per night and earliest start.

  4. 4“Record inventory” → “Reconcile now”: reads courses, slide decks and documents, determines the owner of each and writes the register — without changing content.
  5. 5“Start run now”: immediately checks two objects of the inventory; the report names checked objects and statements, new findings, duration — and what was no longer checked.
  6. 6“Fact check file” (address /pruefkette/akte) shows every checked case: what both checkers answered, which sources they named and whether the statement really appeared there (Fig. 3).
    Fig. 3 A case in the file: the statement, both checkers with their evidence and whether the statement really appeared at the source.
    A case in the file: the statement, both checkers with their evidence and whether the statement really appeared at the source.

    Fig. 3 A case in the file: the statement, both checkers with their evidence and whether the statement really appeared at the source.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The findings#

  • Supported and undisputed
  • Accepted, but not beyond doubt
  • Contradiction — a person decides
  • Divided doctrine — both positions are supported
  • not checked — for example because a source could not be reached; that is not an accusation

Ranking of sources#

  • Primary source (e.g. legal text)
  • Official interpretation
  • Specialist source
  • Other source

Register and responsibility#

Every object in the inventory has someone responsible — the owner of the content or, if there is none, the administration. The reconciliation states the figures: seen, newly added, retired, responsibility changed, responsible only via the administration.

If an object has nobody responsible at all, that is an operational error: the organisation has no administration account that could step in, and reports on this content reach nobody. The page says so explicitly.

Who may do what#

  • Schedule, reconciliation and run: administration and operator.
  • File: the administration sees all cases of its organisation, a lecturer only those concerning content they own — the database decides this, not the page. They may not decide anything (for example on “Contradiction”).

Tips#

  • Disputed questions are not decided but shown with both supported positions (“divided doctrine”).
  • Sources are stored as an evidence copy in the source library so that a vanished web page does not take the evidence with it.
  • “Every 30 days” is an illusion with many objects: the calculation of how long a full run takes with the set number per night is next to the field.

Under review#

Corrections can currently only be applied to workshop courses; for slide decks and uploaded documents the surface gives an honest no. What is still missing in the development is listed by the page itself under “State of development”.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/faktenpruefung

Imported questions as an exam

liveTeaching staffAdministration

Turn an imported question pool (QTI) into a multiple-choice exam of exam creation with one click — release it, count attempts, assess it like any other.

Why#

Whoever brings their inventory also wants to bring their exams — often the most valuable part of the whole course inventory. Nobody should have to retype questions for that.

How it works#

Click pathCourse packageQuestion poolAdopt as exam

  1. 1Deliver the course package with the question pool (QTI 1.2 or 2.x/3, also inside a Common Cartridge); the pool appears in the package as a separate item of the outline.
  2. 2Open the pool. Above the questions, authors (lecturers, administration, operator) see the field “Adopt as exam”.
  3. 3Check or change the title and choose “Create exam”.
  4. 4The feedback states how many questions were adopted and lists every question that did not fit, with the reason.
  5. 5“Open exam” leads into exam creation: the new multiple-choice exam is there as a draft, can be edited and is released like any other.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Prüfungen
  • Part of the module “Exams”. The course package itself needs the interfaces (SCORM, Common Cartridge).

What is adopted#

  • every question with text, exactly four answers and one valid correct answer — with an explanation if the pool has one
  • at most 200 items per exam; anything beyond that is reported
  • not adopted and reported with a reason: a different number of answers, no valid solution, empty text, text too long
  • Matching questions, cloze texts with tolerances and items with partial points were already reported by the import; they are listed in the package under “not adopted”

What the exam can do afterwards#

It is an ordinary multiple-choice exam of exam creation: release for a class or via a link, count attempts (with a maximum per person), assess immediately, result in the achievement archive, certificate on passing.

Camera and behaviour proctoring currently applies to the course exam, not to exams from exam creation — this also applies here.

Who may do what#

  • Only authors may create it: registered lecturers, administration and operator — the same barrier as “New exam”.
  • Only a pool of your own tenant is read; the exam belongs to the author and their tenant.

Tips#

  • The platform's multiple-choice exam knows exactly four answers. Questions with two, three or five answers are neither padded nor shortened but reported — an invented fourth answer changes the question.
  • The exercise in the package stays as it is: ungraded. The exam is a copy; changes to it do not affect the pool.
  • Every adopted question counts one point; weights, pass mark (default 60 %) and explanations can be adjusted in the exam's editor.

Chapter 4

Studies & Administration

University administration: application and admission, student records, surveys, doctorate, library, finances, statistics and careers.

Application & admission

liveStudentsAdministration

The route from the online application with documents via the decision of the admissions office to enrolment.

Why#

Applicants should be able to see at any time where their application stands; the admissions office should check, approve, request or reject documents in one place.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationApplicationsOpen

  1. 1Applicants: open “Application” in the dashboard. Under “How would you like to take part?” choose a route: “Course / further education”, “Single module” or “Full degree” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “How would you like to take part?”: the three routes course/further education, single module and full degree.
    “How would you like to take part?”: the three routes course/further education, single module and full degree.

    Fig. 1 “How would you like to take part?”: the three routes course/further education, single module and full degree.

  2. 2Choose the programme or course, optionally write your motivation and “Submit application” (for further education: “Book & start”).
  3. 3Under “Documents” upload certificate, ID, CV or other (PDF, JPG, PNG, at most 10 MB) (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 A submitted application with status, notes from the admissions office and the uploaded documents.
    A submitted application with status, notes from the admissions office and the uploaded documents.

    Fig. 2 A submitted application with status, notes from the admissions office and the uploaded documents.

  4. 4Admissions office: open “Applications”, choose the tab “Open”, “All”, “Admitted” or “Rejected”.
  5. 5For each application open the documents and choose “Admit”, “Request more” or “Reject”. When requesting more or rejecting, a note to the applicant is required (Fig. 3).
    Fig. 3 An application from the admissions office's point of view: documents to open, “Admit”, “Request more” and “Reject”.
    An application from the admissions office's point of view: documents to open, “Admit”, “Request more” and “Reject”.

    Fig. 3 An application from the admissions office's point of view: documents to open, “Admit”, “Request more” and “Reject”.

  6. 6After admission comes payment or the voucher; then the applicant is enrolled and the student record is created.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Bewerbung & Zulassung

Three routes of participation#

  • Course / further education (without ECTS) — no admission, book and start immediately; also for corporate customers.
  • Single module (with ECTS) — admission required, the documents are checked; the points can be credited at other universities.
  • Full degree (programme) — admission required, the complete programme with a degree.

The status of an application#

  • Submitted
  • Under review
  • Submit further documents (in the administration: “Documents requested”)
  • Admitted
  • Enrolled
  • Rejected
  • Withdrawn

Notices are available to the applicant as PDF. Until online payment is connected, a voucher code enrols; in the tour the code is prefilled and nothing is charged.

Tips#

  • Demo accounts only see fictitious people here; the real administration sees its real applicants.
  • Documents are stored in the EU and can only be viewed by the applicant and the admissions office; every look at them is recorded in the document file.
  • If the system refuses a decision, the account usually lacks the right to make it — the page says so explicitly.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Opens the demo role with fictitious sample data — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/enter?persona=sekretariat&next=%2Fadmin%2Fapplications

Student administration

liveAdministration

The central list of all enrolled students with student record, study status, examinations office and notices.

Why#

The record is the backbone: examinations office, document file and statistics build on it.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationStudentsOpen record

  1. 1Open “Students”.
  2. 2Search by name, matriculation number or email; each row shows matriculation number, programme, route, status, enrolment date and number of courses (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The list of students: matriculation number, programme, route, status, enrolment date and number of courses.
    The list of students: matriculation number, programme, route, status, enrolment date and number of courses.

    Fig. 1 The list of students: matriculation number, programme, route, status, enrolment date and number of courses.

  3. 3Open a record: master data, status with an optional note (“Set status”), applications and documents, enrolled courses (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The master data of a student record.
    The master data of a student record.

    Fig. 2 The master data of a student record.

  4. 4In the section “Examinations office & achievement archive” create and assess achievements, get the grade export as CSV and maintain the transcript data (Fig. 3).
    Fig. 3 “Examinations office & achievement archive” in the record: the achievements with grade and ECTS, “Create achievement” and the grade export.
    “Examinations office & achievement archive” in the record: the achievements with grade and ECTS, “Create achievement” and the grade export.

    Fig. 3 “Examinations office & achievement archive” in the record: the achievements with grade and ECTS, “Create achievement” and the grade export.

  5. 5Under “Notices & certificates” are the person's issued documents.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Bewerbung & Zulassung

The study status#

  • applied
  • admitted
  • enrolled
  • active
  • on leave
  • graduated
  • exmatriculated

Examinations office & achievement archive in the record#

  • Header figures: ECTS account (passed), additional achievements, grade average.
  • Create an achievement: title, grade (1.0–5.0), ECTS, examiner, optionally a review as text; paper and review can be uploaded as files.
  • Additional achievements do not count towards the ECTS account.
  • Transcript data for transcript, Diploma Supplement and Transcript of Records: form of address, mode of study (full-time/part-time), graduation date, programme end date.

What the examinations office enters here, the student sees in their achievement archive — with grade, ECTS and review.

Tips#

  • A student appears as soon as an admitted application has been paid (or redeemed with a voucher) — with a matriculation number.
  • The note on the status is meant for reasons, such as “semester abroad” or the reason for an exmatriculation.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Opens the demo role with fictitious sample data — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/enter?persona=sekretariat&next=%2Fadmin%2Fstudierende

Surveys

liveStudentsAdministration

Course evaluations — answered anonymously, evaluated only as totals and only from five responses.

Why#

Good teaching needs honest feedback. Only those who are sure to remain anonymous answer honestly — that is why the evaluation shows nothing at all when there are too few responses.

How it works#

Click pathCampusStudiesMy surveys

  1. 1Students: in the campus open “Studies” → “My surveys”. If a survey is running for one of your courses, it appears there.
  2. 2Rate the statements on a scale from 1 to 5, optionally write freely (“What helped, what was missing?”) and “Submit anonymously” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The questionnaire: every statement with the scale from 1 to 5.
    The questionnaire: every statement with the scale from 1 to 5.

    Fig. 1 The questionnaire: every statement with the scale from 1 to 5.

  3. 3Administration: under “Quality & governance” → “Surveys” view, per survey, the overall impression, the values per statement and the free feedback (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The evaluation of a survey: overall impression, values per statement and the free feedback.
    The evaluation of a survey: overall impression, values per statement and the free feedback.

    Fig. 2 The evaluation of a survey: overall impression, values per statement and the free feedback.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Hochschulverwaltung

The statements#

  • The course was clearly structured and logically organised.
  • The content was conveyed in an understandable way.
  • The materials (slides, tasks, sources) helped me learn.
  • Questions were addressed; I felt supported.
  • I can transfer what I have learned to my work.
  • The level of the course was appropriate for me (1 = too low, 5 = too high) — this statement does not count towards the overall impression.

Why the answers are truly anonymous#

Storage is separate: that someone has taken part (so that nobody answers twice) and what was answered — without any link between them. Not even the university can bring the two together.

The evaluation only shows totals and only from five responses. Below that, one could work out from the answers who gave them; until then it says “No evaluation yet: n of at least 5”.

Tips#

  • Whoever has taken part in all running surveys sees a thank-you instead of a form — answering twice is not possible.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/befragungen

Doctorate

liveStudentsTeaching staffAdministration

Doctoral procedures from registration to the awarded degree — each stage only once the previous one has been reached and the required documents are in the file.

Why#

A doctoral procedure has many stages and participants. The committee sees, per procedure, what a stage is still missing; doctoral candidates see their status and the next step.

How it works#

Click pathCampusQuality & governanceDoctorate

  1. 1Doctoral candidates: in the campus open “Studies” → “My doctorate” — the steps of the procedure, what is due “next” and the history (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Steps of the procedure” from the doctoral candidate's point of view: done, next, still open.
    “Steps of the procedure” from the doctoral candidate's point of view: done, next, still open.

    Fig. 1 “Steps of the procedure” from the doctoral candidate's point of view: done, next, still open.

  2. 2Doctoral committee: open “Doctorate”; for each procedure “Record document” (a milestone is done) and “Next stage” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 A procedure from the doctoral committee's point of view: open milestones, “Record document”, “Next stage” and the history.
    A procedure from the doctoral committee's point of view: open milestones, “Record document”, “Next stage” and the history.

    Fig. 2 A procedure from the doctoral committee's point of view: open milestones, “Record document”, “Next stage” and the history.

  3. 3If a stage is not yet possible, it says below what it is missing; the button remains locked.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Hochschulverwaltung

The stages and what they require#

  • Registered — the committee checks admission requirements and supervision.
  • Accepted for the doctorate — next, the supervision agreement and exposé belong in the file.
  • In progress — requires the supervision agreement and exposé; progress via milestones (e.g. interim report).
  • Dissertation submitted — requires the submission.
  • Reviewed — requires the first and second review.
  • Defence passed — requires the defence.
  • Completed — requires publication; only then is the degree awarded.
  • Cancelled — reachable from every running stage.

The publication obligation is the reason why the degree is not already awarded with the defence.

Tips#

  • There is deliberately no shortcut — not for the administration either, and not “just for testing”. A procedure that can be skipped proves nothing.
  • Cancelling is possible from every running stage: withdrawal must always be possible.
  • Without a recorded procedure, the doctoral candidate's page explains how it starts: with acceptance by the doctoral committee.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/promotion

Careers & talent

liveStudentsAdministration

Your own external profile, internships and jobs from partner companies — every kind of visibility is a separate decision of the person, default “nobody”.

Why#

Studies lead into a profession. Companies find talent, students find internships — and nobody is visible who does not want to be.

How it works#

Click pathDashboardMy external profile

  1. 1Students: in the dashboard open the card “My external profile”. First set who sees the profile (four levels), then separately whether the study status is shown as well (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Who sees the profile?”: the four levels of visibility.
    “Who sees the profile?”: the four levels of visibility.

    Fig. 1 “Who sees the profile?”: the four levels of visibility.

  2. 2Check the block “This and only this would go out” — no course names, no grades, no individual exams (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “This and only this would go out”: the preview of what a company would see.
    “This and only this would go out”: the preview of what a company would see.

    Fig. 2 “This and only this would go out”: the preview of what a company would see.

  3. 3Fill in headline, “About me”, skills, “I am looking for” (internship, working student job, entry-level job, nothing at the moment), goal, website and “What can I be approached for?” and “Save profile”.
  4. 4“Who follows me” shows in full which companies have bookmarked the profile.
  5. 5“Careers” shows the internship exchange and the public talent profiles; for a job “Express interest”, optionally with a short message.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Alumni & Karriere

Who sees the profile — four levels#

  • Nobody — only you (default).
  • Other graduates of this university.
  • Graduates and verified companies.
  • Everyone, also without signing in.

The study status is a separate decision, independent of visibility: it also says something about detours — that is why it is asked separately.

What you can be approached for#

  • Internship
  • Working student job
  • Thesis in a company
  • Research project
  • Mentoring by alumni
  • Professional exchange

Tips#

  • “Delete profile” removes the external profile completely.
  • A company that follows you gets no additional access through it — what it sees is decided solely by your own setting.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/boerse

Employer matching

liveAdministration

For each advertised position: who has expressed interest and which visible talent profiles fit.

Why#

Career services bring supply and demand together instead of comparing lists.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationMatching

  1. 1Open “Matching”.
  2. 2“Create job posting”: title, company, location, type, description and optionally a link.
  3. 3For each posting view two columns: the interested people with their message and the matching talent profiles (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 A posting with two columns: the interested people with their message and the matching talent profiles.
    A posting with two columns: the interested people with their message and the matching talent profiles.

    Fig. 1 A posting with two columns: the interested people with their message and the matching talent profiles.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Alumni & Karriere

What is shown per posting#

  • The posting itself — title, company, type.
  • Interested people — students who have “expressed interest”, with their message and status.
  • Matching profiles — visible external profiles whose search fits the type, with headline and skills.

Without a posting the page stays empty; the first one is created via the button at the top.

Tips#

  • A profile counts as matching if its “I am looking for” fits the type of the position — and if it is visible to companies at all.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/arbeitgeber

Library

liveStudentsTeaching staffAdministration

The institution's media library and the source library, in which every source is listed with an evidence copy and what it is used for.

Why#

If a source turns out to be wrong or moves, it must be visible immediately which statements depend on it.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationQuality & governanceSource library

  1. 1Media library: in the campus “Service” → “Library” — interviews, podcasts, explainer videos, lectures, books and articles, each with origin and visibility (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 A medium of the media library with type, title, origin, visibility and citation style.
    A medium of the media library with type, title, origin, visibility and citation style.

    Fig. 1 A medium of the media library with type, title, origin, visibility and citation style.

  2. 2Source library (administration): open “Library”. Every source is listed with type, identifier, level, usage and — for online sources — an evidence copy (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 A source of the source library: type, identifier, level, usage and the evidence copy.
    A source of the source library: type, identifier, level, usage and the evidence copy.

    Fig. 2 A source of the source library: type, identifier, level, usage and the evidence copy.

  3. 3“Fetch missing copies” fetches missing evidence copies; “Resubmit now” checks whether every source is still reachable and still says the same.
  4. 4“Record publication”: enter ISBN, ISSN or DOI — the identifier is checked immediately — plus title, page and the wording at that point.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Hochschulverwaltung

Evidence copy and resubmission#

Online sources move: addresses change, pages disappear. The evidence copy records what was there at the time of access; it is not public. For publications the evidence is the catalogue entry, not a copy.

The resubmission checks whether every source is still there today and still says the same. The second case is the dangerous one: address and title still match, only the content no longer does. The list then marks “moved”, “content changed” or “not reachable”.

Tips#

  • The source library fills itself as soon as the fact check runs: every source a checker cites is classified.
  • Page and wording are mandatory for publications: the identifier proves that the publication exists — not that it says what is claimed.

Under review#

The campus media library is a demo surface with sample data; the administration's source library works with real data.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/bibliothek

Notice board

in progressStudentsTeaching staffAdministration

Notices of your own institution: announcements with category and run time, polls with one vote per person and a personal watch list; the administration creates, extends and withdraws them.

Why#

What everyone should know belongs in a place everyone knows — filterable so that the important does not get lost in the many, and time-limited so that old items disappear by themselves.

How it works#

Click pathStudiesNotice board

  1. 1Members: open “Notice board” (address /studium/brett). You see the notices that are currently posted, newest first.
  2. 2At the top filter by category (general information, poll, event, system, exam) and semester, optionally “Watch list only” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The notice board filters on the demo surface: semester, category and news type.
    The notice board filters on the demo surface: semester, category and news type.

    Fig. 1 The notice board filters on the demo surface: semester, category and news type.

  3. 3“more” expands long texts. “Bookmark” puts a notice on your own watch list, “Bookmarked” takes it off again (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 An announcement on the demo surface with date, category, news type, text and “Bookmark”.
    An announcement on the demo surface with date, category, news type, text and “Bookmark”.

    Fig. 2 An announcement on the demo surface with date, category, news type, text and “Bookmark”.

  4. 4In a poll choose an answer: every person has one vote; the result only appears after your own vote.
  5. 5Administration: under “Notice board” in the administration (/admin/brett) create a new notice — category, optionally news type and semester, title, text, “Visible from” and “Visible until”, optionally “With poll” with two to eight answers.
  6. 6Below are all notices with their status (scheduled, posted, expired, withdrawn) and the poll results; “+30 days” extends, “Withdraw” takes a notice off the board immediately.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Hochschulverwaltung
  • Part of the module “University administration”; switchable per tenant.
  • Run time without an entry 30 days, at most one year.

What a notice carries#

  • Category
  • News type and semester (optional)
  • Title and text (up to 8,000 characters)
  • Period: visible from, visible until
  • optionally a poll with 2–8 answers

How voting works#

  • Every signed-in person of the tenant has exactly one vote per poll — recorded in the database, not in the browser.
  • A second vote changes nothing; voting is only possible while the notice is posted.
  • Votes are counted in the database; only totals are shown, never who voted how.

Who may do what#

  • Read, vote, bookmark: signed-in members of your own institution.
  • Create, extend, withdraw, see results: the administration of your own institution.
  • Every query is bound to the tenant boundary; a guard in the code checks this per query.

Tips#

  • You only see the results of a poll after your own vote — so the interim result does not influence you.
  • A withdrawn notice is gone for members immediately; in the administration it remains visible with the status “withdrawn”.
  • For concerns with justification and discussion there is the community.

Under review#

Built; migration 374 is awaiting approval — until then the board and the administration report “not yet set up”. The defaults (the administration creates, 30 days run time, one vote per signed-in member) apply until the owner decides. The public demo surface /g-uds/blackboard continues to show sample data.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds/blackboard

Finances

liveAdministrationOperator

Tuition fees per route and brand with enrolment figures, and the lecturers' fee ledger.

Why#

Income and expenditure of the study operation at a glance.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationFinances

  1. 1Open “Finances”.
  2. 2At the top “Tuition fees per track”: fee per route and brand with the number of enrolled students (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Tuition fees per track”: fee per route with the number of enrolled students.
    “Tuition fees per track”: fee per route with the number of enrolled students.

    Fig. 1 “Tuition fees per track”: fee per route with the number of enrolled students.

  3. 3At the bottom “Lecturer fees”: choose a lecturer, enter description (e.g. “Teaching M3”), amount and period (e.g. “2027-Q1”) and “Record” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “Lecturer fees”: recorded items and the form for a new one.
    “Lecturer fees”: recorded items and the form for a new one.

    Fig. 2 “Lecturer fees”: recorded items and the form for a new one.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Hochschulverwaltung

The fee ledger#

  • Per entry: lecturer, description, amount in euros, period.
  • Status: open, approved, paid out.
  • The lecturer sees their entries under “Fees” in the lecturer area.

Tips#

  • Fees can only be recorded once there are accounts with the lecturer role; the page says so as long as none exists.

Under review#

Payment collection is connected separately; the university's instance does not currently bill through it.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/finanzen

Statistics

liveAdministrationOperator

Key figures of the institution from real data: admission funnel, students by status, applications by route, ECTS awarded, pass rate.

Why#

The management should see in one picture how the university is doing — from real data, not from yesterday's spreadsheet.

How it works#

Click pathCampusQuality & governanceStatistics

  1. 1Open “Statistics”.
  2. 2At the top the key figures: total applications, students, active courses, ECTS awarded, pass rate, achievements assessed (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The six key figures: applications, students, active courses, ECTS awarded, pass rate and achievements assessed.
    The six key figures: applications, students, active courses, ECTS awarded, pass rate and achievements assessed.

    Fig. 1 The six key figures: applications, students, active courses, ECTS awarded, pass rate and achievements assessed.

  3. 3Below that the admission funnel (received → decided → admitted → enrolled), students by status and applications by route (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The admission funnel and the students by status as bars.
    The admission funnel and the students by status as bars.

    Fig. 2 The admission funnel and the students by status as bars.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Hochschulverwaltung

The key figures in detail#

The funnel counts applications by progress: received, decided, admitted, enrolled. Next to it students by study status and applications by route.

  • Total applications
  • Students
  • Active courses
  • ECTS awarded
  • Pass rate
  • Achievements assessed

Tips#

  • The figures update from live data when the page is opened — there is no export or reference date here.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/statistik

Document audit

liveAdministration

The document file: who saw which document when and which documents have exceeded their retention period.

Why#

Data protection requires proof: log access, observe deadlines.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationDocuments

  1. 1Open “Document file”.
  2. 2At the top the documents beyond their retention period — empty means “No overdue documents”.
  3. 3Below that the access log of the last 50 accesses: time, who viewed it, which type of document, which student (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The access log: time, who viewed it, which type of document and which student.
    The access log: time, who viewed it, which type of document and which student.

    Fig. 1 The access log: time, who viewed it, which type of document and which student.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Hochschulverwaltung

What is logged#

  • Time of access.
  • Who viewed it.
  • Which type of document — application document, achievement (paper) or achievement (review).
  • Which student it belongs to.

Every document carries a retention period; anything beyond it is listed at the top.

Tips#

  • Application documents are logged as well as papers and reviews from the achievement archive.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/dokumente

Company partners

liveAdministration

The entrance for companies: create a profile, prepare offers — publishing and seeing talent only after review by the university.

Why#

In the external profile students reveal something about themselves. That is why only a verified company sees anything — and a waiting company sees what it is waiting for.

How it works#

Click pathCompany access

  1. 1Companies: in the dashboard open the card “Company access” and register the company (name, domain, location, website, contact address, short description).
  2. 2During the review: maintain “Your presence” and prepare internships, working student and permanent positions, theses and research projects under “Offers”.
  3. 3The university reviews under “Companies”: “Approve”, “Revoke approval”, “Block”, “Unblock”.
  4. 4After approval: offers become visible; under “Students and graduates” search by focus, goal or keyword and follow people.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Personal & Weiterbildung

Three states of a company#

  • awaiting review — creating and preparing is possible, nothing becomes visible;
  • verified — offers are visible, talent can be found;
  • blocked — the access no longer works; students it followed see “a company whose access the university has withdrawn”.

Tips#

  • The talent search deliberately finds few: only those who have explicitly opened up to companies.
  • Below every offer is the company's presence — an offer without a traceable sender would be an anonymous advertisement.

Chapter 5

Course Workshop & Avatars

A presentation, a document or a video becomes a course with slides, narration, figure and voice — in four phases: Content, Design, Speakers & Interaction, Publish.

Course workshop at a glance

liveTeaching staffAdministration

Build courses yourself: material in, the AI suggests a structure, slides and narration are created, an avatar presents — in four phases.

Why#

Existing material — a presentation, a script, a video — should become a course in hours rather than weeks, which you can publish, present and download.

How it works#

Click pathLearning workshopNew course

  1. 1Open “Learning workshop” and choose “New course” — or continue a draft from “Your drafts” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 A course's guide: the four phases Content, Design, Speakers & Interaction and Publish with progress, below them the sub-steps of the current phase.
    A course's guide: the four phases Content, Design, Speakers & Interaction and Publish with progress, below them the sub-steps of the current phase.

    Fig. 1 A course's guide: the four phases Content, Design, Speakers & Interaction and Publish with progress, below them the sub-steps of the current phase.

  2. 2Phase 1 · Content: define the outline, then work out every slide with narration and presentation.
  3. 3Phase 2 · Design: logo and colours, music, transitions, further versions. The defaults usually fit.
  4. 4Phase 3 · Speakers & Interaction: choose figure and voice, define languages, place the speaker per slide.
  5. 5Phase 4 · Publish: release, share, present or download as video, presentation file, PDF or course package.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Kurs-Studio
  • Module “Course Studio” with usage for text models, speech output and images.
  • Every sub-step has its own address — the browser's back button and bookmarks work.
  • The workshop saves automatically; switching steps loses nothing.

Four phases, six steps#

  • Content → 1 Outline (modules and slides) · 2 Slides (narration and presentation)
  • Design → 3 Look & sound
  • Speakers & Interaction → 4 Figure & voice · 5 Placing
  • Publish → 6 Publish

The guide shows four words and a progress bar at the top; below them only the sub-steps of the current phase. On the phone it says “Step 2 of 4 · Design” with four dots.

What “done” means#

  • Outline: done as soon as there are slides.
  • Slides: done when every slide has narration and presentation — otherwise “n of m slides still missing”.
  • Look & sound: has defaults, counts as done.
  • Figure & voice: done when figure and voice are set.
  • Placing: slides without their own decision use the automatic speaker spot — that is a finished state.
  • Publish: done when the course is published.

Tips#

  • Keyboard shortcuts: Alt+1 to Alt+4 jumps to the phase; “?” shows all shortcuts.
  • Only what makes no sense without slides is locked. Whoever knows what they are doing jumps straight to step 4.
  • Trial author account: upload your own presentation without signing in and have a course built; the account disappears after one day.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

A trial access is created automatically and disappears after a day — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Creating a course from material

liveTeaching staff

Put in files, up to three web addresses or a text — the workshop reads it, recognises the topics and suggests a course; or adopt a presentation 1:1, film a text as a script, start empty.

Why#

Nobody should start from zero. What already exists — slides, scripts, web pages, videos — becomes the starting point; the AI suggests, the author decides.

How it works#

Click pathLearning workshopNew courseDrag material in

  1. 1In the learning workshop (address /studio/kurs) “New course” — “What should it be created from?”.
  2. 2Drag material in (“Drag a file here or select one”: PDF, word processing, presentation, spreadsheet, text, SVG graphics, ZIP, video), enter up to three addresses separated by spaces under “Web address” or paste anything from a sentence to a finished text under “Text” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “What should it be created from?”: file, web address or text, plus length, further options and filing.
    “What should it be created from?”: file, web address or text, plus length, further options and filing.

    Fig. 1 “What should it be created from?”: file, web address or text, plus length, further options and filing.

  3. 3Choose “Length” (Automatic, Short, Medium, Long — “about n slides”) and under “More options” the AI's writing style and the spoken duration; under “File under” choose or create a folder.
  4. 4“Draft course”. While “Reading material … Recognising topics … Drafting structure …” runs you do not have to wait: the suggestion is then under “Your drafts”, even if the tab was closed.
  5. 5Check the suggestion (“Suggestion — nothing has been created yet”): modules, slides, form of address (informal or formal), certificate; a click on a slide sketches the planned content. “What the AI saw in the material” lists the findings.
  6. 6Under “Adjust: modules, slides, duration” change values and “Suggest again with these values”; “Suggest topics” adds sensible topics, your own can be written line by line (“Include topics”).
  7. 7“Create course & write slides” — only now is the course created.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Kurs-Studio
  • Part of the module “Course Studio”; which text model writes follows from the text models the tenant has enabled.
  • Files up to 100 MB each; large slide decks go directly into storage.

Four routes to a course#

  • Draft course — the AI reads the material and suggests modules and slides.
  • Film a script — a text remains the narration word for word; per paragraph (or per “## Scene”) a slide is created with presentation, speaker spot and ideas for interstitial images.
  • Adopt presentation 1:1 — slides without AI rework; then apply corporate design, speaker and exports. Included vector graphics replace embedded images of the same name.
  • Empty course — you create outline and slides yourself; the AI helps on request.

What the report after a 1:1 adoption states#

  • how many slides were adopted and which instructions were read
  • how many stage directions moved from the narration into the intent of the slide
  • slides with a target duration and the total minutes (of which estimated)
  • slides without source numbers in the narration
  • adopted exam questions
  • archive entries that were not adopted

If instructions do not match the slides, the report says so — the import is then the usual one.

Who may do what#

The learning workshop is open to every signed-in account if the tenant has booked Course Studio; every author sees their own drafts and courses (plus those shared by colleagues). Without an account of your own, trial access leads into a trial workshop.

Tips#

  • Three other routes are below the button: “Create empty course” (one module, one slide), “Or: film the text verbatim as a script” (one slide per paragraph, the text remains the narration word for word) and “Adopt presentation 1:1 (without AI)”.
  • With the 1:1 adoption an included file can be read as production instructions: the import then knows what in the speaker notes is direction and what is narration — with markers, target durations, house colours and included exam questions.
  • From a video the audio track is created in the browser; the transcript with timestamps is produced in the EU and serves as material.
  • A course package (file extension .kurs.json) from another installation is adopted as a new draft — nothing is overwritten.
  • Third-party courses in the standard format (SCORM, Common Cartridge with question pools) are adopted by the administration under “Third-party content”.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

A trial access is created automatically and disappears after a day — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Phase 1 · Content: outline and slides

liveTeaching staff

Define modules and slides, then work out every slide with narration and presentation — the longest and most important step.

Why#

The focus belongs at the beginning: on the content. Look, figure and video only come afterwards.

How it works#

Click pathCourseContentOutlineSlides

  1. 1“Outline”: create, move, rename modules and slides — or set the time and have a suggestion made. Via “Change scope” modules, slides and speaking time can also be adjusted afterwards, also per module (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Change scope”: modules, slides and speaking time — for the whole course or per module.
    “Change scope”: modules, slides and speaking time — for the whole course or per module.

    Fig. 1 “Change scope”: modules, slides and speaking time — for the whole course or per module.

  2. 2“Slides”: slide by slide write the narration or have it generated and choose a presentation (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The slide overview: every slide as a tile with the status of narration and presentation.
    The slide overview: every slide as a tile with the status of narration and presentation.

    Fig. 2 The slide overview: every slide as a tile with the status of narration and presentation.

  3. 3Graphic or image: describe what should be seen and generate it — a suggestion with versions to browse is created; only “Accept” inserts it.
  4. 4Record stage directions for the presentation (for the draft and per slide).
  5. 5For notes from the fact check, check the highlighted passage and accept or discard the suggestion with sources.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

What a slide consists of#

  • Narration — what the avatar says.
  • Presentation — a template (e.g. bullet list, comparison, key figure), an explanatory graphic, an image or a freely designed surface.
  • On the free surface: text, image, video, graphic, shape and the speaker spot; at most 40 elements per slide.
  • Optional: an exercise, a role play or a question at the end of the slide.

AI suggests, the person decides#

Everything an AI generates — text, graphic, image — first lands as a suggestion next to the slide. Several versions can be browsed; “Accept” or “Discard”. Nothing lands on the slide unasked, and every acceptance can be undone.

Tips#

  • Explanatory graphics reveal themselves in time with the voice-over: markers in the narration determine when which element appears.
  • No generation without a description — whoever has no idea can get suggestions with “Ideas for a graphic”.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

A trial access is created automatically and disappears after a day — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Phase 2 · Design: look & sound

liveTeaching staff

Style, logo, signet, surface behind the speaker, background music, transitions and further versions of the course.

Why#

A course carries the corporate design of its institution. Everything has defaults — whoever changes nothing is still done.

How it works#

Click pathCourseDesignLook & sound

  1. 1Open “Look & sound”.
  2. 2Look: choose style, logo, signet and the surface behind the speaker (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Look”: style, logo, signet and the surface behind the speaker.
    “Look”: style, logo, signet and the surface behind the speaker.

    Fig. 1 “Look”: style, logo, signet and the surface behind the speaker.

  3. 3Music: choose a mood (e.g. Calm, Focus, Departure); it automatically gets quieter during speech (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “Music”: the moods to choose from; it automatically gets quieter during speech.
    “Music”: the moods to choose from; it automatically gets quieter during speech.

    Fig. 2 “Music”: the moods to choose from; it automatically gets quieter during speech.

  4. 4Transitions: cut, soft fade, slide, zoom in or wipe — applies to every slide without its own choice, in the player, in the presentation and in the video.
  5. 5Versions: create a translation, short or long version as a separate variant (Fig. 3).
    Fig. 3 “Versions”: translation, short or long version as a separate variant.
    “Versions”: translation, short or long version as a separate variant.

    Fig. 3 “Versions”: translation, short or long version as a separate variant.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The brand of the course#

A course carries the brand of the organisation it names: logo, colours, slide font and footer. This applies in the player, in the presentation, in the export and in the video — even when the course runs on another institution's installation. If an organisation has no logo of its own, its signet is shown.

Music and transitions#

  • Moods of the background music, e.g. “Calm” (wide pads, hardly any movement), “Focus” (quiet arpeggio — the classic for explainer videos), “Departure” (driving pulse).
  • The music gets quieter as soon as someone speaks.
  • Transitions: cut (immediate), soft fade, slide in from the right, zoom in, wipe. A slide can have its own choice.

Further versions#

Variants are created from a course: a translation, a short version, a long version. Every variant is created as a new draft — the original remains unchanged.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

A trial access is created automatically and disappears after a day — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Phase 3 · Speakers & Interaction

liveTeaching staff

Who speaks the course, in which languages, with which voice — and where the speaker stands on every slide.

Why#

The figure comes before placing: when placing, it stands live on the slide, and you should see whom you are choosing the spot for.

How it works#

Click pathCourseSpeakers & InteractionFigure & voice

  1. 1Open “Figure & voice”: choose a figure (default figure, your own figure from a photo or “My avatar”) (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Figure & voice”: the chosen figure with its voice, optionally several speakers per slide range.
    “Figure & voice”: the chosen figure with its voice, optionally several speakers per slide range.

    Fig. 1 “Figure & voice”: the chosen figure with its voice, optionally several speakers per slide range.

  2. 2The voice belongs to the figure. Several speakers per slide range are possible (“Slides 1–3 spoken by A, 4–8 by B”).
  3. 3Below it is the course's voice model: “Voice model: new (v4)” or “Voice model: previous”. New courses speak with the new model; an existing course only switches via “Switch to the new voice model” and a confirmation.
  4. 4Define languages: per language “full” (whole course as video, at most two), “start” (the first slides are ready, the rest is created while watching) or “off”. The estimated rendering costs are shown below, with their derivation (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The course's languages: per language “full”, “start” or “off”, below them the estimated rendering costs.
    The course's languages: per language “full”, “start” or “off”, below them the estimated rendering costs.

    Fig. 2 The course's languages: per language “full”, “start” or “off”, below them the estimated rendering costs.

  5. 5“Placing”: decide per slide where and how large the speaker stands (see speaker spot).

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Head start instead of waiting#

Production runs ahead of the viewer: for languages in “start” mode the first slides are ready as video. If someone switches to this language, video plays immediately, and the rest is created while they watch. This way a course saves a large part of the rendering costs without anyone waiting.

When re-rendering happens#

Changed narration orders the avatar video of that slide again. A different voice version or cast, on the other hand, does not change finished videos by itself; they are only re-rendered after explicit approval.

The course's voice model#

Every course remembers which voice model it is voiced with. Courses created before 17.10.2026 and courses from files stay with the previous model — also for new slides, new variants and new languages. This way the voice never changes in the middle of a course. Newly created courses speak with the new model (v4) from the start.

Live answers in the course (Ask me, tutor, presentation view) follow the course's voice model; a course with the new model answers with its real-time variant.

Switching is only possible explicitly under “Figure & voice” → “Voice model” and can be undone. Recordings already stored remain in use until new voicing is approved; until then a switched course can contain slides of both models.

Tips#

  • A new cast applies to videos created from now on. Finished videos are never re-rendered on their own — only after approval.
  • In the trial account the default figure speaks with its own voice; your own figures are available in your own organisation.
  • Switching the voice model orders nothing: slides already voiced and finished videos remain unchanged; new voicing only happens after approval.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

A trial access is created automatically and disappears after a day — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Several speakers on one slide

liveTeaching staff

Interview and conversation: a slide's narration is divided into sections, every section has its speaker with their own figure and voice — the videos are ordered per section on request and played seamlessly one after another in the player.

Why#

A conversation between two experts explains some things better than a lecture — for example a lecturer and an expert taking turns on the same slide.

How it works#

Click pathSlide editorInsertSeveral speakers

  1. 1In the slide editor “Insert” → “Several speakers”: “Add speaker”, choose a name and figure (the voice comes from the figure), “Place spot on the slide” and move and scale the spot on the slide.
  2. 2Under “Who speaks which sentence” assign every sentence of the narration to a speaker (Fig. 1). Consecutive sentences of the same speaker form a section; the order of the sentences is the order of the sequence.
    Fig. 1 The field “Several speakers”: the speakers with figure and spot and below them “Who speaks which sentence”.
    The field “Several speakers”: the speakers with figure and spot and below them “Who speaks which sentence”.

    Fig. 1 The field “Several speakers”: the speakers with figure and spot and below them “Who speaks which sentence”.

  3. 3Under “Videos per section” is the sequence: who speaks in which order and the status of every video — “Video ready”, “In progress”, “Outdated”, “Video missing”, “Voice missing”, “Figure missing”. With several course languages the language is chosen at the top right.
  4. 4Missing sections are preselected, outdated ones are not. Below that the estimated computing minutes (1.2 per section). “Order sections” and then “Yes, order” commission the selected sections — nothing is ordered before that.
  5. 5Once all sections of a slide are ready, the course player plays them one after another: every speaker with their own voice, a guest at their spot on the slide, the name of the person speaking is visible. Subtitles, reveal, read-along and speed follow the whole sequence.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Kurs-Studio
  • Part of the module “Course Studio”; switchable per tenant. If the switch is off, there is no order button and no sequence in the player.

Ordering and costs#

  • one video per section with figure, voice and text of the person speaking
  • only on request and after confirmation; the estimated computing minutes are shown beforehand
  • at most three new orders per call; what remains open is reported and can be ordered again
  • a video that is already finished or running is not ordered a second time
  • new recordings speak with the course's voice model (setting “Voice model”)

Other languages#

  • translation happens per section, not for the whole slide — so in every language who speaks which sentence is preserved
  • the translation is created when ordering and stored for the player

In the player#

  • the sequence only runs if every section of the slide is ready in this language
  • the next section is preloaded; the switch happens without a pause
  • if a section is missing or outdated, the course's speaker speaks the whole slide as before, and guests appear as still images at their spots

Tips#

  • Every face speaks only with its own voice: a guest without a voice of their own gets no order — never the course voice.
  • If a sentence is changed, it loses its assignment and falls back to the course's speaker; it is never put into a stranger's mouth.
  • Finished videos are never re-rendered automatically. A changed section is shown as “Outdated”; it is only ordered again if it is selected and the order is confirmed.
  • What is ordered is the saved state of an accepted slide in a published course. The order rejects unsaved changes.

Phase 4 · Publish

liveTeaching staff

Release the course, view it as a student, share it, present it or download it — as video, presentation file, PDF or standard package for other learning systems.

Why#

At the end of a long run you want to know how to continue: who sees the course, and in what form do I take it with me?

How it works#

Click pathCoursePublish

  1. 1Open “Publish”. At the top the summary: modules, slides, how many with a set speaker (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The status of the course with the summary and the button “Publish” or “Back to draft”.
    The status of the course with the summary and the button “Publish” or “Back to draft”.

    Fig. 1 The status of the course with the summary and the button “Publish” or “Back to draft”.

  2. 2“View as a student first” — shows exactly what a student sees, without the author bar.
  3. 3“Publish”: afterwards the assigned students see the course. Withdrawing is possible at any time (“Back to draft”).
  4. 4“Present”: “Presentation” (full screen with speaker) or “As zoom canvas” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “Present”: presentation with speaker or as zoom canvas.
    “Present”: presentation with speaker or as zoom canvas.

    Fig. 2 “Present”: presentation with speaker or as zoom canvas.

  5. 5“Download”: choose format and modules (Fig. 3).
    Fig. 3 “Download”: choose format and modules.
    “Download”: choose format and modules.

    Fig. 3 “Download”: choose format and modules.

  6. 6“Share link” creates a public view link.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The formats#

  • One video per module — one lesson, one MP4 file; the usual choice for a learning system.
  • One video in one piece — the whole course in one file.
  • Presentation file — the slides for further editing, with speaker notes.
  • Presentation file with video — with the speaker window as in the presentation; large file.
  • PDF — for printing and distributing.
  • SCORM package (1.2) — for another learning system: slides, subtitles, progress reporting.

The video recording runs in the presentation view and is started there by hand — in real time. It costs no GPU minute, only run time.

Tips#

  • If the text of a module has been changed since the last recording, the page warns: the video file says something different there from the course and must be recorded again.
  • Changes in the workshop apply immediately to a published course.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

A trial access is created automatically and disappears after a day — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Avatars & voices

liveTeaching staffAdministrationOperator

Your own figures from a photo and your own voices from a recording — with consent as a condition and one fixed rule: every face speaks only with its own voice.

Why#

A course works when the presenter is familiar. Universities build their figures themselves, without the provider's involvement — and nobody ever has a stranger's voice put into their mouth.

How it works#

Click pathLearning workshopAvatar workshop

  1. 1Open “Avatar workshop”.
  2. 20 · Record consent: name of the person depicted, date, period of validity, what it applies to (image, voice) and upload the signed proof (PDF, PNG or JPEG). Without proof nothing is recorded (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Record consent”: person, date, period of validity, purpose and the signed proof.
    “Record consent”: person, date, period of validity, purpose and the signed proof.

    Fig. 1 “Record consent”: person, date, period of validity, purpose and the signed proof.

  3. 3Upload a photo; from it the figure is created with mouth shapes, blinking and eyebrows, then a running preview (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The photo for the figure, linked to a recorded consent.
    The photo for the figure, linked to a recorded consent.

    Fig. 2 The photo for the figure, linked to a recorded consent.

  4. 4Voice: record or upload a speech sample; duration, sampling rate and proportion of silence are checked before building (Fig. 3).
    Fig. 3 The voice: record or upload a speech sample; duration, sampling rate and silence are checked before building.
    The voice: record or upload a speech sample; duration, sampling rate and silence are checked before building.

    Fig. 3 The voice: record or upload a speech sample; duration, sampling rate and silence are checked before building.

  5. 5The administration releases the figure for students. After that it can be chosen in every course workshop under “Figure & voice”.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Eigene Avatare
  • Module “Own avatars” (requires “Avatar lecturer”); building on the GPU and the voice are counted as usage.

The rule: every face has one voice#

A figure speaks with its own voice — the voice assigned to it when it was created — or not at all. There is no substitute voice that steps in when its own is not available at the moment. In the past such a fallback sounded like “it works” and was the opposite: a face with another person's voice.

The one exception is none: a course without its own cast is presented by the default figure, and it speaks with its own voice assigned to it.

This rule is recorded in the code and protected by automatic guards; a term that would promise a “substitute voice” does not reach the screen in any of the fifteen languages.

Consent as a technical condition#

  • Image and voice are consented to separately.
  • No figure is built without a stored, signed proof.
  • A withdrawal takes effect immediately.
  • Everything a figure says is labelled as AI-generated for learners.

Pre-produced and live#

The presentation of a slide is available as a pre-produced video (audio from the file). For follow-up questions a lip-synchronous head answers live. Both run on self-operated graphics machines in the EU.

Tips#

  • A withdrawal of consent takes effect immediately: the figure no longer speaks.
  • A figure without a voice does not speak. If the voice is missing, the answer appears as text, and the log says why.

My avatar

liveTeaching staff

Lecturers make themselves the speaker of their courses: consent, photo or video selfie, voice, test, use — revocable at any time.

Why#

Your own course with your own face and your own voice — without a studio and without an appointment.

How it works#

Click pathLearning workshopMy avatar

  1. 1Open “Learning workshop” → “My avatar” (address /werkstatt/ich). At the top the four steps: photo, voice, test, use (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The four steps to your own avatar: photo, voice, test, use.
    The four steps to your own avatar: photo, voice, test, use.

    Fig. 1 The four steps to your own avatar: photo, voice, test, use.

  2. 2“Your consent”: “Name as it appears in the course”, tick “I am the person depicted …” and “I am aware: my avatar will be … labelled as AI-generated”, optionally “My voice may also be cloned” — “Consent and continue” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “Your consent”: name in the course, the two confirmations and the choice of whether the voice may also be cloned.
    “Your consent”: name in the course, the two confirmations and the choice of whether the voice may also be cloned.

    Fig. 2 “Your consent”: name in the course, the two confirmations and the choice of whether the voice may also be cloned.

  3. 3Photo: “Record video selfie” (four seconds, the sharpest frame is taken) or “Upload photo” — straight into the camera, mouth closed, even light from the front, head and shoulders in the picture. Then “Use this image”.
  4. 4Voice: “Own voice (30 s)” — read the displayed text calmly, “Finished speaking”; or choose a ready-made voice.
  5. 5Test: “Listen to test sentence” — the moving image is created with the first course video.
  6. 6Use: “Use as speaker” — afterwards the avatar can be chosen in all your own courses when placing the speaker.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Eigene Avatare
  • Part of the module “Own avatars” (requires the module “Avatar lecturer”).

What the assistant checks#

  • No person clearly recognisable → “Please move closer to the camera.”
  • Low camera resolution → the image is upscaled slightly; a photo from the phone will be sharper.
  • Recording too short or almost silent → once more, completely and closer to the microphone.
  • Camera or microphone not permitted → notice to allow access, or upload a photo.

Image, voice and labelling#

Image and voice are processed in the EU, not used to train third-party models and can be revoked at any time. Everything the avatar says is labelled as AI-generated for learners.

The rule “Every face speaks only with its own voice” applies: without consent to your own voice, the avatar speaks with a chosen ready-made voice — never with another person's voice.

Who may do what#

Lecturers with teaching authorisation, workshop authors, administration and operator — each only for themselves.

Tips#

  • The green background during building is intentional; it is removed afterwards so that the figure stands freely on the slides.
  • You can close the page; the build continues, and the status is shown there on your next visit.
  • “Withdraw consent”: the avatar then stops speaking immediately — in no course and not live.
  • The figure only appears in your own courses, not with colleagues.

Text models of the workshop

liveAdministrationOperatorTeaching staff

Which language model writes the slide texts can be enabled per tenant — three models from different providers, one of them processed in the EU (Paris); models that cannot be chosen are greyed out with a reason.

Why#

Some institutions require processing exclusively in the EU, others want the strongest model. The customer makes the decision — and whoever chooses a model gets exactly that one or a clear refusal, never silently a different one.

How it works#

Click pathCourseContentSlideSourcesAI models

  1. 1Under “Control” the operator enables per tenant which text models the workshop may offer.
  2. 2In the workshop under “Content” open a slide; in the box “Sources — fetch content” choose the tab “AI models”.
  3. 3Under “Text models” take a selectable model; the chosen one writes the slide texts (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Sources — fetch content”, tab “AI models”: selectable text models and greyed-out ones with a reason.
    “Sources — fetch content”, tab “AI models”: selectable text models and greyed-out ones with a reason.

    Fig. 1 “Sources — fetch content”, tab “AI models”: selectable text models and greyed-out ones with a reason.

  4. 4Models that cannot be chosen are greyed out, with a reason: “Switched off in the admin panel”, “Not yet connected” or “Not enabled for this institution”.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Kurs-Studio
  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Kurs-Studio
  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Kurs-Studio
  • Part of the module “Course Studio”.

Three conditions, all must be met#

  • Enabled — the switch in the feature catalogue is on for the tenant.
  • Access stored — the provider's key is set in the installation.
  • Connected — there is a route to this model in the house.

The reasons have a ranking: “switched off” beats everything (the administration has decided), then “not connected”, then “without access”. So the author always sees the reason they can pass on.

Who may do what#

  • Enable per tenant: the operator in the feature catalogue.
  • Choose: every workshop author among the enabled models.

Tips#

  • If no model is chosen, the first selectable one in the priority list writes. That is not necessarily the model processed in the EU — whoever requires that enables only this one for the tenant.
  • The slide routes also reject a model that cannot be chosen if someone requests it directly — the same calculation decides in the display and in the check.
  • In the event of an outage the workshop only falls back to a model that can also be chosen for the tenant.

Under review#

The third model is not yet connected in the house and therefore cannot be chosen, even if it is enabled.

Workshop credits

liveOperator

A credit account per organisation for the workshop: balance, available models, price table per model and operation, latest bookings.

Why#

AI usage costs money. The credit makes visible what the workshop has used and what is still left.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationWorkshop credits

  1. 1Open “Workshop credits” in the administration's bar.
  2. 2At the top the balance with “Total credited” and “Total used”; the top-up button is still locked (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The balance with “Total credited” and “Total used”.
    The balance with “Total credited” and “Total used”.

    Fig. 1 The balance with “Total credited” and “Total used”.

  3. 3“Models”: which models are connected — or “not connected (key missing)”. “Default” appears at the model that writes for this institution without a choice (the first selectable one in the priority list) (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “Models”: connected or not, and which one is the “Default” for this institution.
    “Models”: connected or not, and which one is the “Default” for this institution.

    Fig. 2 “Models”: connected or not, and which one is the “Default” for this institution.

  4. 4“Price table”: credits per operation (“Generate slide”, “Generate image”) and model (Fig. 3).
    Fig. 3 The price table: credits per operation and model.
    The price table: credits per operation and model.

    Fig. 3 The price table: credits per operation and model.

  5. 5“Latest bookings”: time, operation, model, change in credits and balance afterwards.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: LernWerkstatt
  • Part of the module “Learning workshop”.

Who may do what#

The page requires the operator role; it shows the account of the organisation to which the signed-in account belongs.

Tips#

  • The account is kept per organisation. An account without an organisation generates via the basic licence and does not charge any credit — the page says so.
  • Premium models and images cost more credits than the cheapest model (the fair-use tariff).

Under review#

The account is real; topping up by invoice or payment is not yet connected.

Explanatory graphics and images

liveTeaching staff

Graphics are created from the narration and reveal themselves in time with the voice-over — as text instead of pixels, hence translatable; images show a scene. Both only as a suggestion, never unasked.

Why#

A graphic that shows exactly what the speaker is talking about explains better than a full slide. And nothing should land on a slide that the author has not chosen.

How it works#

Click pathCourseContentSlideGenerate graphic

  1. 1Write the narration first — the graphic follows its structure.
  2. 2Describe under “What should the graphic or image show?” (e.g. “Three profiles side by side, each with an icon and two keywords”) — or choose “Ideas for a graphic” or “Ideas for an image”. Without a description nothing is generated (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “What should the graphic or image show?” with the buttons for ideas, “Generate graphic” and “Generate image”.
    “What should the graphic or image show?” with the buttons for ideas, “Generate graphic” and “Generate image”.

    Fig. 1 “What should the graphic or image show?” with the buttons for ideas, “Generate graphic” and “Generate image”.

  3. 3“Generate graphic” (explanatory graphic from the narration) or “Generate image” (photo or image scene according to the description).
  4. 4The suggestion appears as a version: “Version n of m”, browse with ‹ and ›, “Accept” or “Discard”. Nothing changes on the slide until “Accept”.
  5. 5Set reveal markers in the narration at which the next element appears.
  6. 6In the new slide editor a graphic can be broken down to every label and edited freely.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

  • Part of the module “Course Studio”.

Revealing in time with the voice#

An explanatory graphic consists of stages. Every stage appears at a marker ⟨r⟩ in the narration — without matching markers evenly over the speaking time. In the slide editor this can be dragged and reordered under “Build-up in time with the voice”.

Changing only markers leaves a finished video valid; whoever changes the spoken text invalidates the slide's video — it has to be created again, and that never happens by itself.

Translating#

When the slide is translated, the labels of the graphic are translated too — in one pass with the slide text.

Who may do what#

Every author of the course. A guard in the code ensures that no AI output gets onto the slide past the version bar.

Tips#

  • The graphic explains and reveals along with the narration; it is translatable and stays sharp. The image shows — it is not translated along with it.
  • Even after accepting you can browse back to an earlier version with ‹; the versions stay in the browser, a reload does not eat them.
  • If a slide comes from the platform's kit and no longer shows the original graphic, the workshop offers “Restore original”.

Chapter 6

Stage

The new slide editor, in which every element is handled directly on the slide, plus presenting, speaker spot, presenter view and the zoom canvas.

New slide editor (“Stage”)

liveTeaching staff

Edit slides directly on the slide: grab, move, rotate, align every element — with history, named versions and the original, to which you can return at any time.

Why#

A slide should be editable as in a good presentation program — large, direct, without forms. And nothing should get lost: every step is in the history, even abandoned states.

How it works#

Click pathCourseContentSlidesEdit large

  1. 1In the workshop under “Content” → “Slides” choose a slide and open “Edit large” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The stage of a slide in the workshop with toolbar and “Edit large”.
    The stage of a slide in the workshop with toolbar and “Edit large”.

    Fig. 1 The stage of a slide in the workshop with toolbar and “Edit large”.

  2. 2Click an element: on the right the design bar appears (shape, fill, corners, opacity, rotation, layers, align, distribute, group).
  3. 3Double-click on text: type. Dragging moves, the eight handles scale, the round handle rotates (with Shift in 15° steps).
  4. 4At the top “Insert”: heading, text box, shapes (rectangle, rounded, circle, triangle, arrow, line), upload image, generate image or graphic, beam from phone, video, speaker spot, several speakers, layers, camera path (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “Insert”: heading, text box, shapes, image, graphic, beam from phone, video, speaker spot, layers and camera path.
    “Insert”: heading, text box, shapes, image, graphic, beam from phone, video, speaker spot, layers and camera path.

    Fig. 2 “Insert”: heading, text box, shapes, image, graphic, beam from phone, video, speaker spot, layers and camera path.

  5. 5“History and versions”: steps back and forward, name and save a version, jump to an earlier state, “Original” or “Back to template”.
  6. 6“Done” closes the stage; saving happens on closing.
  7. 7“Slide deck” (at the top of the workshop or in the stage, Ctrl/⌘+F) opens the bar for all slides on the right: chapters and table of contents, find & replace (Fig. 3).
    Fig. 3 The bar “Slide deck”: slides in chapters, collapsible, with “Suggest chapters” and “Insert table of contents”.
    The bar “Slide deck”: slides in chapters, collapsible, with “Suggest chapters” and “Insert table of contents”.

    Fig. 3 The bar “Slide deck”: slides in chapters, collapsible, with “Suggest chapters” and “Insert table of contents”.

  8. 8After a design change, “Apply to other slides” below the design bar offers to transfer it to selected slides, the whole chapter or all slides — with “affects n slides” beforehand.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Kurs-Studio
  • Off: the previous editor of the free surface (fallback).
  • Part of the module “Course Studio”.

What can be on a slide#

  • Text (heading, text box) with font, border and alignment
  • Image — show whole, fill or stretch; crop; replace
  • Video — starts by itself, loop, with sound
  • Graphic — can also be broken down to every label (“Ungroup”, “Break apart completely”)
  • Shape — rectangle, ellipse, triangle, arrow, line, with fill and corner rounding
  • Speaker spot — at most one per slide; frame shape circle, rounded, rectangle or without frame
  • Guests — further speakers with their own figure and their own spot (see “Several speakers”)

A slide carries at most 40 elements.

History: nothing gets lost#

Every step is in the history with an understandable name (“Moved”, “Resized”, “Suggestion accepted”). Named versions save a state permanently. Whoever goes back and does something new does not lose the old path: it is preserved as an “abandoned state” and can be restored.

“Original” shows the slide as it looked when first opened; “Back to template” turns a converted slide back into the original template — this too can be undone.

AI only as a suggestion#

A generated image or graphic appears in the suggestion window, not on the slide. Several suggestions can be browsed; only “Accept” (or “Replace selected”) inserts it. A guard in the code ensures that no AI output gets onto the slide past this point.

Every edit is a command#

At the core of the editor a slide changes at one single point only: through a command in a plain, storable format, such as “move element 3 by 5 percent to the right”. Mouse, finger and keyboard translate their input into such commands.

This has two consequences: for every state the history also stores the command that led to it, and a second device can replay the same commands and arrives at the same state. New input routes — gesture in front of the camera, phone as a remote control, voice, second screen — therefore need no new core.

The core is a self-contained module without ties to courses, roles or database. So it can later be split off as a separate app for phone, tablet, web and computer.

What you see, learners see too#

The stage draws a slide with the same building blocks as the course player. A guard checks that editor and player deliver the same rendering — no surprises after publishing.

Older slides with text in fixed pixels also look in the large editor as they do in the player: the editor calculates as if the slide were on the player's stage. Nothing changes in the course itself.

Triangle and arrow come out of the export as slide deck and as PDF as triangle and arrow, styled words with their styling.

Styling individual words#

Double-clicking a text opens typing directly on the slide. Above it is a small bar: select words, then bold, italic, underlined, colour, smaller or larger. Without a selection the choice applies to the whole text; “Normal” removes the styling of the selected words.

Older tools continue to see the text as a whole. If they change it, the slide shows the new text plainly — never an outdated one.

Camera path: drag, timeline, test run#

“Insert” → “Camera path” opens the stops. On the slide a stop is moved at its edge or its number and dragged larger or smaller at its corners; it keeps the aspect ratio of the slide.

The timeline shows when the camera moves to which point — as in the player at the markers ⟨r⟩ in the narration, without matching markers evenly over the speaking time. “Test run” plays the path (space: pause, arrows: next/previous stop, Esc: close).

Build-up in time with the voice#

Below the slide the bar “Build-up in time with the voice” can be expanded. At the top the narration as a timeline with its markers ⟨r⟩: drag a marker to another position (it jumps to the next word start), double-click sets a new one, × removes it. The spoken text stays the same — finished videos remain valid.

Below it the stages of the elements, as the player plays them: every stage appears at its share of the speaking time. Drag an element into another stage or move it with ‹ ›; “Automatic again” returns to the reading-order sequence.

Several speakers on one slide#

“Insert” → “Several speakers”: create speakers, choose a figure and give them a spot with “Place spot on the slide”, which can be moved and scaled on the slide. A speaker with their own figure is a guest; they stand at their spot in the player and in the presentation.

Under “Who speaks which sentence” every sentence of the narration is assigned to a speaker. “Videos per section” shows the sequence of sections with the status of their videos; there the selected sections are ordered on request (see “Several speakers on one slide” under “Workshop”).

Every face speaks only with its own voice. As long as not every section of a slide has a finished video, the course's speaker speaks the whole slide, and a guest appears as a still image at their spot. Finished videos are never re-created automatically.

History on every device#

History and saved versions of a slide are also saved on the server as soon as the corresponding database extension has been released. Then you find on the tablet what you saved on the laptop; the more recent state applies, nothing of the older one is lost (“State from another device”). Until then the history stays in the device's browser.

Chapters and table of contents#

The bar “Slide deck” lists all slides of the course, organised into chapters; every chapter can be collapsed. “Chapter from here” on a slide starts a chapter, a double-click on the name renames it, the arrows move it together with its slides (within a module), × dissolves it — the slides remain. The arrows on the first and last slide of a chapter pass it to the neighbouring chapter.

“Suggest chapters” reads the modules or the slide titles (numbered titles, the same prefix such as “GDPR: …”) and shows a suggestion. Only “Accept” creates the chapters.

“Insert table of contents” creates a slide with the chapters (or slides, or both) and their slide numbers. It is updated with every change to titles, chapters and order and marked as “Contents” in the list; heading, font and colour stay as the author sets them. “Detach” turns it into an ordinary slide. With up to four entries it gets jump buttons to the chapters in the course; in the export (slide deck, PDF) it appears with text and numbers.

The presentation does not jump when an entry is clicked; there you page through as usual. The numbers count the whole course — whoever exports only individual modules sees the course's numbers.

Find and replace across all slides#

Search in slide text, titles, narration and intent/notes — each selectable —, with match case and “whole words only”, in all slides, one chapter or the ticked slides. The hit list shows slide and context; “Replace” replaces one hit, “Replace all” all of them in one step, which “Undo” in the bar reverses completely.

Styled words keep their styling, the markers ⟨r⟩ in the narration stay where they are, and slides from templates remain templates. If a narration changes, finished videos are not regenerated; a recording with old text appears as outdated under “Publish”.

Apply to other slides#

Below the design bar is “Apply to other slides”. What: the last design change (e.g. colour of the title — it then applies to the title of every slide, likewise for text, header and footer, speaker, image, shape), the entire design of the selected element, the background, the speaker spot, the logo or the transition. Where: only this slide, selected slides, whole chapter or all slides. Beforehand it says how many slides are affected.

Slides that deviate by hand remain unchanged unless “Also overwrite deviating ones” is ticked. Slides from templates without a matching element also stay as they are. Every application is one step and can be undone in the bar “Slide deck”.

What the history contains#

  • Types: original, saved version, abandoned state, suggestion.
  • Steps with names, including: Moved, Resized, Rotated, Design changed, Aligned, Distributed, Layer changed, Inserted, Deleted, Duplicated, Grouped, Text changed, Graphic broken apart, Image replaced, Suggestion accepted, Beam photo, Figure chosen, Speaker changed, Camera path changed, Build-up changed, Changed from outside.
  • “Restore” brings back a state, “Delete version” removes a saved version.

Who may do what#

Every author of the course in the workshop. If the feature “New slide editor” is off for the tenant, “Edit large” opens the previous editor of the free surface.

Tips#

  • Keys: click selects · Shift+click or dragging a frame selects several · arrow keys move (further with Shift) · Ctrl/⌘+Z back, Ctrl/⌘+Y forward · Ctrl/⌘+D duplicate · Del deletes · Alt suspends snapping.
  • When dragging, the element snaps to edges and centres of the slide and of the other elements; guide lines show what it snaps to.
  • A slide from a template is converted into freely movable elements on the first change — the original is preserved.
  • Rotated elements snap to elements with the same tilt — a slanted guide line shows the common edge. When rotating, the angle snaps to the tilt of the other elements.
  • In text: select words and choose bold, italic, underlined, colour or size in the small bar above (Ctrl/⌘+B, I, U).
  • Across all slides: Ctrl/⌘+F find, Ctrl/⌘+H (on the Mac also ⌥⌘F) replace; Enter jumps to the next hit, in the replace field Enter replaces this hit and Ctrl/⌘+Enter all. Esc closes the bar.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

A trial access is created automatically and disappears after a day — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Interactive slides: levers, sliders, scenarios

liveTeaching staff

Sliders and levers on the slide change everything bound to them live — numbers, bars, markers, colours, visibility. Operable while presenting with mouse, finger, keyboard, from the phone, by voice and with gestures.

Why#

A slide with key figures should not only show but answer: “What if the contribution margin falls?” Instead of a second slide you move the slider — break-even tile, marker on the timeline, payback period and footnote move along.

How it works#

Click pathCourseContentSlidesEdit largeInsertLevers & sliders

  1. 1In the slide editor under “Insert” → “Interactive” → “Levers & sliders” open the panel.
  2. 2“+ Lever”: define name (for formulas), display name, minimum, maximum, step, start value, unit and format; the slider next to it shows the value immediately.
  3. 3“+ Formula”: derived quantities such as “breakeven = kosten / db” — the value is shown live next to it, errors (e.g. circular reference) in red instead of a crash.
  4. 4Select an element on the slide → in the design bar “Bind to lever” (or in the panel “Bind selected element”) → choose the property → set expression and mapping.
  5. 5“Insert control” (slider, rotary knob, plus/minus, toggle, choice chips, number field) or “Insert chart” (bar, line, pie with expressions as data points).
  6. 6Scenarios: “Current values as scenario”, rename, mark as plan with ★; “Back to plan” leads there. Scenarios cross-fade softly.
  7. 7Quick start: template “Business model (interactive)” — key figure tiles, timeline with break-even marker, sliders and scenarios.
  8. 8Presenting: operate sliders on the slide; in the presenter view the lever console has all sliders, scenarios, undo, voice command, camera gestures and “Phone as remote control” (QR code).

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Kurs-Studio
  • Switchable per tenant (feature “Interactive slides”, default on). Off: slides show their saved values, nothing is operable, the “Levers” panel is missing, the phone page does not respond.
  • Part of the module “Course Studio”.

Levers and formulas#

A lever is a number with a range and a grid (e.g. contribution margin 200–900 €, step 10). Formulas calculate further from it and may build on each other. A formula that needs itself by a detour is reported as a “circular reference” — the slide then shows a warning sign instead of a number, nothing crashes.

Formulas are never executed as program code: a small calculator of its own knows only numbers, names and the functions listed. A guard in the code ensures this.

Renaming a lever carries through everywhere: formulas, scenarios, bindings, controls and charts.

What can be bound#

  • Text with placeholders (numbers visibly count along when changing)
  • Position left/top — e.g. a marker on a scale between minimum and maximum
  • Width/height — bars and progress bars
  • Rotation — pointers and gauge needles
  • Opacity and visibility — show or hide from a threshold
  • Fill, text, background and border colour — as a gradient between two colours or with a threshold (below X red, otherwise green)
  • Font size and border width
  • Emphasis: the element pulses while a condition holds

Mappings: “Value directly”, “Range → range” (e.g. 136 … 1,400 participants → 10 … 90 % of the slide width), “Gradient”, “Threshold”.

Presenting live: console, phone, voice, gestures#

Every operation — slider, console, phone, voice command, gesture — is the same command at the core of the editor. That is why there is “Undo” everywhere, and audience window, presenter view and phone show the same state.

Phone: in the presenter view choose “Phone as remote control” and scan the QR code. The phone needs no sign-in; the random address is the key. Only lever names and numbers are transmitted.

Voice: recognition via the platform's EU service; without it there is no fallback to another service. Camera gestures: only after being explicitly switched on, evaluated only in the browser — no image leaves the device.

Limits#

  • At most 24 levers, 40 formulas and 8 scenarios per slide; expressions up to 500 characters.
  • PPTX and PDF export show the saved state as a still image.
  • The camera only recognises the fist with the hand model on its own server; without it, up, down and swipe work.
  • Fellow learners in “Live co-learning” see the slide with their own sliders, not the presenter's values.

Tips#

  • Placeholders in text: {{breakeven|≈0}} inserts the value; after the bar the format — “0 €” (7,500 €), “≈0” (≈ 310), “T0 T€” (172 k€), “1 %”, “/10” rounds to tens, “+0” shows the sign.
  • Formulas: + − × ÷ ^, brackets, min, max, round (runden), round up (aufrunden), round down (abrunden), abs, square root (wurzel), clamp (begrenzen), sum (summe), mean (mittel), if (wenn(condition; then; else)), comparisons, and/or/not.
  • Voice (button “Speak” in the console): “contribution margin to 600”, “fee plus 50”, “costs minus 10 percent”, “scenario ambitious”, “back to plan”, “undo” — in German and English.
  • Gestures: hand up/down changes the selected lever, swiping selects the next lever (then the scenarios), fist holds, open hand releases. On the screen: drag vertically with two fingers or swipe horizontally.
  • Nothing is saved while presenting: the values apply until “Back to plan” or reloading. Values set in the editor are saved.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

A trial access is created automatically and disappears after a day — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Live source: the phone streams into the slide

liveTeaching staff

A phone's camera, screen, photo or video appears live on the slide — with sound, directly from device to device, without recording. Paired via QR code, accepted by the presenter.

Why#

An experiment on the lab bench, a sketch on paper, a guest in the room, a video from the phone: instead of holding the phone under a camera or sending files back and forth, its image appears exactly in the spot the slide provides for it — and can be pulled across the whole slide on request.

How it works#

Click pathCourseContentSlidesEdit largeInsertLive source (phone)

  1. 1In the slide editor under “Insert” → “Media” → “Live source (phone)” open the panel and choose “Insert live source”.
  2. 2Move and scale the spot like any element; in the panel set aspect ratio (free, 16:9, 4:3, 1:1, 9:16, 3:4), show image whole or fill, corners, border, background, label of the placeholder, sound, volume and mirroring.
  3. 3Presenting: in the presenter view, below the lever console, is the console “Live sources” — “Pair phone” shows a QR code (only there, not on the projector). Without a presenter view: “Live sources” at the bottom left of the presentation.
  4. 4On the phone scan the QR code, confirm the data protection notice, choose the source (camera rear/front, screen, photo or video, sound only), microphone on or off, “Request to send”.
  5. 5The presenter sees “… would like to send live” — “Accept” or “Decline”. Only after accepting does an image go out.
  6. 6Live: sound on/off, volume, mirror, “Full screen” (the source covers the slide), “Back to slide”, “Disconnect”. The same by voice and with camera gestures. On the phone the source can be changed at any time without pairing again.
  7. 7In the editor the same pairing works as a preview (without sound) — in the panel “Live source” under the settings of the selected spot.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Kurs-Studio
  • Switchable per tenant (feature “Phone stream in slides”, default on). Off: live sources only show their placeholder, the panel is missing in the editor, the phone page does not respond.
  • Part of the module “Course Studio”.
  • For connections across firewalls the operation needs a relay server (TURN, environment `STREAM_TURN_URLS` and `STREAM_TURN_SECRET`). Without it, it works reliably on the same Wi-Fi, but not always via mobile networks and strict networks — the interface then says so.

How the connection is made#

The QR code contains a random, short-lived room code. The phone registers in this room and makes a request; the presenter sees the name of the device and accepts or declines. Only then do audience window and presenter view contact the phone, and it builds a direct connection to each of them.

Image and sound go from device to device (WebRTC, encrypted). Only the brokering runs via the platform's server: who requests, who accepts, how the devices reach each other. There is no table for it and no recording.

Every movement is a command at the core of the editor — pairing, accepting, sound, volume, mirroring, full screen, disconnecting —, whether by button, voice, gesture or from a second window. That is why audience window and presenter view always show the same state.

Data protection#

  • On the phone a consent notice appears before the first image: what is sent, where to, and that nothing is stored.
  • Nothing is recorded — neither on the phone nor in the presentation nor on the server. A guard in the code ensures this.
  • If the presentation records itself (video export), the live source stays as the placeholder.
  • Only the presenter sees the QR code (in the presentation only after a click); every device must be accepted and can be disconnected at any time — from both sides.
  • A routing server (STUN) only learns the public address of the devices; a relay server (TURN), if set up, passes on the encrypted stream without being able to read it.

Limits#

  • Without a relay server (TURN) some networks fail (university Wi-Fi with device isolation, mobile networks). What helps then: put both devices on the same Wi-Fi.
  • Screen sharing only on a computer; not in the browser on phones and tablets.
  • The sound only plays in the audience window; without an open audience window the sound is muted. If the browser only allows sound after a click, “Turn on sound” appears on the source.
  • PPTX and PDF export show a named spot instead of the live image; the course player shows the placeholder.
  • Voice commands understand German and English.

Tips#

  • Several phones: one per live source. The same identifier (q1, q2 …) on several slides is the same source — it stays connected when the slide changes.
  • The sound only plays in the audience window. The presenter view and the editor show the image muted — otherwise there would be echo. Microphone and loudspeaker in the same room: keep the volume moderate, keep your distance.
  • Voice: “connect phone”, “mute”, “unmute”, “louder”, “quieter”, “full screen”, “full screen off” / “back to slide”, “mirror”, “disconnect phone”; with number or label (“source 2 full screen”, “board mute”) — in English and German.
  • Gestures (camera gestures in the console): hand up = full screen, down = back to slide, swipe = next connected source in full screen, fist = mute, open hand = unmute.
  • Screen sharing works in the browser on a computer (e.g. to include a second laptop). On phones and tablets the browser cannot share a screen — that comes with the apps. Photo or video from the phone works everywhere.
  • If the code has expired (after 15 minutes without a request), simply pair again. A phone that is already connected stays connected.

Speaker spot

liveTeaching staff

Decide slide by slide where and how large the speaker stands — and whether at all. The calculation makes a suggestion, the author approves.

Why#

A calculated spot varies between “covers the key figure” and “postage-stamp-sized at the edge”. That is why the calculation remains a suggestion; what applies is decided by the author per slide.

How it works#

Click pathCourseSpeakers & InteractionPlacing

  1. 1In the workshop open “Speakers & Interaction” → “Placing”.
  2. 2“Where does the speaker stand on this slide?” — choose a template: bubble top right, bottom right, bottom left; half figure right or left; in a frame on the right; large right, left or in the centre; without speaker (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Where does the speaker stand on this slide?”: the templates from the bubble to “without speaker”, below them style and shape.
    “Where does the speaker stand on this slide?”: the templates from the bubble to “without speaker”, below them style and shape.

    Fig. 1 “Where does the speaker stand on this slide?”: the templates from the bubble to “without speaker”, below them style and shape.

  3. 3Under “Details” change style (bubble, half figure, large) and shape (circle, rounded, rectangle, cut out).
  4. 4Drag the speaker freely and change its size; logo and elements can also be moved for this slide.
  5. 5“Approve & next” — after the last slide “Approve & done” leads to publishing.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The suggestion and its reasoning#

For every slide the workshop calculates a spot from the slide's elements — for graphics from what is actually drawn — and gives the reason in one sentence:

  • “The slide has its own placeholder for the speaker.”
  • “Little content on this slide — the speaker may stand large next to it.”
  • “Free space for a bubble of … % width — the slide stays whole.”
  • “The slide is full — the content moves to the left, the speaker stands next to it and covers nothing.”

Slides without their own decision use this suggestion. That is a finished state: with hundreds of slides nobody has to set each one individually.

Styles and shapes#

  • Bubble — small round speaker, the slide stays whole.
  • Half figure — cut out next to the content; the slide moves to the side. Also “in a frame”: half figure in a rounded box with background.
  • Large — over the full height on the right, left or in front of the slide in the centre (for titles and transitions).
  • Without speaker — on this slide only the voice.
  • Shapes: circle, rounded, rectangle, cut out; plus a crop of the figure.

Phone and tablet#

There is a separate layout for small screens. A handle shrinks the slide (down to 35 percent) so that the speaker has room next to it; the setting is saved separately.

Tips#

  • Guide lines and snapping can be switched off individually (off = move freely). Four small markers on the axes of the bubble show its centre.
  • Your own guide lines are created where the bubble currently stands and belong to the slide deck — so the speaker always stands in the same place across many slides and sessions.
  • The dashed image area shows where the speaker is visible in the video.
  • Arrow keys move finely; the box may go beyond the edge, the crop trims it as in the player.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

A trial access is created automatically and disappears after a day — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Presenting

liveTeaching staff

Have the course presented in full screen with speaker — live in front of an audience or recorded as a video.

Why#

A course is also a talk: in the lecture, at the conference, in the meeting. The presentation shows slide and speaker without workshop bars.

How it works#

Click pathCoursePublishPresentPresentation

  1. 1Open “Publish” → “Present” → “Presentation”.
  2. 2Page through with the arrow keys or the buttons at the edge; switch full screen on and off; background music on or off (it gets quieter during speech).
  3. 3Show or hide the speaker cameo.
  4. 4Export as video: choose the scope (one video in one piece or one per module), with or without speaker sound, then “Start recording”. In the browser's sharing dialog choose this tab and the tab audio (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Export as video”: the three steps of the recording, scope (in one piece or per module) and speaker sound.
    “Export as video”: the three steps of the recording, scope (in one piece or per module) and speaker sound.

    Fig. 1 “Export as video”: the three steps of the recording, scope (in one piece or per module) and speaker sound.

  5. 5“To the course” leads back to the workshop.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

How a video is made#

  • The presentation runs through automatically; the speaker reads every slide.
  • Slides with a pre-produced video play it, the others speak live with the figure's voice.
  • The browser tab is recorded including sound; the result is an MP4 or WebM file, depending on the browser.
  • A video in one piece contains title, agenda and closing image.

Tips#

  • During recording a window shows progress, remaining time and the voice costs so far; slides with a finished video cost nothing. Esc cancels.
  • Every finished file is saved immediately; with one video per module several files are created.
  • The presentation covers the platform's header and control buttons — nothing overlays the slide.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

A trial access is created automatically and disappears after a day — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe?ziel=%2Fstudio%2Fkurs

Presenter view

liveTeaching staff

The presenter's private view: current and next slide, narration as a note, laser and pen, rehearsal against the schedule — and save changes to the text directly.

Why#

Whoever presents themselves needs their notes and wants to see the next step without the audience seeing it. And they want to know beforehand whether the time is enough.

How it works#

Click pathCourseSpeakers & InteractionPlacingPresenter view

  1. 1In the workshop open “Speakers & Interaction” → “Placing” and choose “Presenter view” at the top next to the heading.
  2. 2“Open presentation” opens the window for the audience — drag it to the second screen. It follows every movement of the presenter view.
  3. 3Page with → , space or Page Down, or ← and Page Up. At the top “Slide n of m”; on the last slide “Last slide — end of the presentation.”
  4. 4“Laser” points at something, “Pen” draws on the slide (colour and size selectable); “Clear drawing” tidies up. The drawing disappears when paging (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The presenter view: the current slide with laser, pen, colours and “Slide n of m”.
    The presenter view: the current slide with laser, pen, colours and “Slide n of m”.

    Fig. 1 The presenter view: the current slide with laser, pen, colours and “Slide n of m”.

  5. 5On the right the “Narration”: change and save it; “AI text” writes it to match the slide — with “Tone” (factual, lively, concise) and “Length” (short, medium, long) (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 On the right the next slide and the narration for editing, with “AI text”, tone and length.
    On the right the next slide and the narration for editing, with “AI text”, tone and length.

    Fig. 2 On the right the next slide and the narration for editing, with “AI text”, tone and length.

  6. 6“Rehearsal”: measures the actual time per slide against the speaking time plan; “Reset timer” starts again. The result shows actual and planned per slide, the total and the target in minutes.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

  • Part of the module “Course Studio”.

Two browser views, one talk#

Presenter view and presentation talk to each other in the same browser: when the presenter pages, the audience window pages along. Notes, rehearsal and next slide are seen only by the presenter.

The rehearsal#

  • Actual — the measured time per slide
  • Plan — the planned speaking time from the narration
  • Total and target in minutes
  • “Again” starts a new run

Who may do what#

Every author of the course; the page requires signing in.

Tips#

  • The slide loses nothing when the narration is saved. A changed spoken text invalidates a finished video of the slide — it is never re-created by itself.
  • Slides that have not yet been worked out are marked as such (“This slide has not yet been worked out.”).
  • “Cockpit” or “Back to the studio” leads back into the workshop.

Zoom canvas and camera path

liveTeaching staff

The whole course as one large surface, the presentation as a flight from stop to stop — and within a slide stops that are zoomed in one after another in time with the voice.

Why#

Show connections: first the whole, then the detail. The canvas makes the structure of a course visible, the camera path directs attention to what is being talked about.

How it works#

Click pathCoursePublishPresentAs zoom canvas

  1. 1Open “Publish” → “Present” → “As zoom canvas” (also from the workshop cockpit).
  2. 2Choose “Mode”: “Presentation” or “Arrange”.
  3. 3Presentation: “Play” flies the path, at every slide the speaker speaks. Whoever zooms or pans themselves stops it; “Next (→)” continues, “Overview (O)” shows the whole course, “Full screen (F)”.
  4. 4Arrange: clicking a slide selects it (several with Shift), dragging moves, the round handle changes the size; fine-tune “Size” and “Rotation”; “Arrangement” circle, row or spiral; choose “Background” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The toolbar of the zoom canvas: arrangement, size, rotation, background and the path.
    The toolbar of the zoom canvas: arrangement, size, rotation, background and the path.

    Fig. 1 The toolbar of the zoom canvas: arrangement, size, rotation, background and the path.

  5. 5Maintain the “Path”: insert selected slides as a stop (“Slide”), show several together (“Group”), zoom into a detail (“Section”) or “Default” (overview → per module overview and slides → overview). Order stops with “Up”/“Down” or remove them.
  6. 6“Save this canvas” — the header shows “saved” with the time or “Suggestion — not yet saved”.
  7. 7Camera path within a slide: in the slide editor “Insert” → “Camera path” (see below).

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

  • Part of the module “Course Studio”; the camera path belongs to the new slide editor.

Kinds of stops#

  • Overview — the whole course
  • Slide — one slide
  • Group — several slides together
  • Section — a detail of a slide that is zoomed into

Camera path within a slide#

  • In the slide editor “Insert” → “Camera path”: add “Stop around the selection” or “Whole slide”; without stops the slide stays still.
  • On the slide drag a stop at its edge or its number, drag a corner to make it larger or smaller — it keeps the aspect ratio of the slide.
  • In the list “Earlier”, “Later” or “Delete stop”.
  • The “Camera path timeline” shows when the camera moves to which point: at the markers ⟨r⟩ in the narration; without matching markers evenly over the speaking time; without narration 2.5 seconds per stop.
  • “Test run” plays the path — space pauses, arrows jump from stop to stop, Esc closes.

The timing of the stops follows the same rule as the build-ups in the player (markers ⟨r⟩ in the narration); a guard compares the editor's calculation with the player's.

Who may do what#

Every author of the course; the canvas requires signing in and saves per course.

Tips#

  • Keys of the canvas: ← and → (or Page Up/Down) for previous and next stop, Home or O for the overview, F for full screen; in presentation mode also the space bar.
  • Dragging an empty area pans, the mouse wheel zooms. A click on a stop in the list flies there; new stops are inserted after the marked one.
  • Background music gets quieter during speech.

Beam from phone

liveTeaching staff

Take a photo with the phone and throw it directly onto the slide — via QR code, without cables and without signing in on the phone.

Why#

A sketch on paper, a board drawing, an object: what lies in front of you is on the slide within seconds.

How it works#

Click pathSlide editorInsertBeam (phone)

  1. 1In the slide editor choose “Insert” → “Beam (phone)” (in the workshop also in the box “Sources” under “BEAM” → “Start BEAM”) (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The box “Sources” with “Start BEAM”: photos from the phone directly onto the slide.
    The box “Sources” with “Start BEAM”: photos from the phone directly onto the slide.

    Fig. 1 The box “Sources” with “Start BEAM”: photos from the phone directly onto the slide.

  2. 2Drag the dashed beam frame to where the photo should land and drag it to size.
  3. 3Scan the QR code with the phone. A page opens on the phone: “📷 Choose / take photo”.
  4. 4The photo appears in the frame; on the phone it says “Sent!” — further photos can be sent afterwards.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

  • Part of the module “Course Studio”.

Why this is safe without signing in on the phone#

The QR code carries a short-lived token signed by the server. It is the permission — nothing more: whoever has it can send photos for this one session but read nothing. After 15 minutes it is worthless.

Who may do what#

Start: the signed-in author in the editor. Send: whoever scans the QR code while it is valid.

Tips#

  • The link is only valid briefly (15 minutes) and is bound to the editor session that is currently open; afterwards simply start a new beam.
  • In the editor's history a beamed photo appears as a step of its own (“Beam photo”) — it can be undone like any other change.

Voice and gestures in the slide editor

liveTeaching staff

Edit slides by voice command and with gestures in front of the camera — “to the right”, “undo”, “new heading”; swiping in the air moves the selected element.

Why#

Whoever stands in front of an audience or does not have their hands free cannot always reach mouse and keyboard. Because every edit is a command at the core, the new input route needs no new editor: voice and gesture trigger exactly the commands that mouse and keyboard trigger.

How it works#

Click pathSlide editorVoice / Gestures

  1. 1In the slide editor press “Voice” at the top right, say a sentence and press again (after eight seconds it stops listening by itself).
  2. 2German and English are understood: “undo”, “redo”, “to the right”, “three to the left”, “new heading”, “insert text”, “delete”, “duplicate”, “group”, “bring to front”, “align left”, “centre”, “element 2”, “next”.
  3. 3What was not understood is shown by the editor with the sentence it heard — nothing happens then.
  4. 4Press “Gestures”, read the notice and “Turn on camera”: swiping left, right, up or down moves the selected element, the open hand undoes the last step, the fist selects the next element.
  5. 5“Gestures off” switches the camera off immediately.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Kurs-Studio
  • Part of the module “Course Studio”; switchable per tenant.

How it works#

The spoken sentence goes via the platform's speech recognition (EU, without falling back to services outside the EU) back to the editor. There the core turns it into an intent — the same one a key triggers — and the editor executes it as a command, with history and “undo”.

The camera is evaluated only in the browser; no image leaves the device, nothing is stored.

Further input routes of the stage#

  • When presenting interactive slides: levers by voice, camera gesture and phone as console (see “Interactive slides”)
  • Stream phone camera, screen or video live into the slide (see “Phone stream”)
  • Phone photo directly onto the slide (see “Beam”)

A second device can co-edit the same slide — see “A second device edits along”.

Who may do what#

Whoever may edit the slide in the editor may also do so by voice and gesture — there are no additional rights and no way around the editor's rights.

Tips#

  • Without a number, “to the right” moves by five percent of the slide width, like the arrow key with Shift; more than half a slide at once is capped as a mishearing.
  • “Insert” alone inserts what was copied before; “insert text” creates a new text box.
  • Without a hand model on the server the camera only recognises movements (up, down, left, right) — not the fist and the open hand then.

A second device edits along (“Dual Canvas”)

liveTeaching staff

Pair a tablet or phone with the slide editor via QR code: it shows the slide, moves, deletes and duplicates elements and throws text onto the slide.

Why#

In front of an audience you do not stand at the computer. With a paired second device the slide can be built further from your hand without touching the computer.

How it works#

Click pathSlide editorSecond device

  1. 1In the slide editor choose “Second device” at the top right; a QR code appears.
  2. 2Open the QR code with the tablet or phone. The device makes a request; in the editor “… would like to edit along” appears with “Accept” and “Decline”.
  3. 3After “Accept” the device shows the slide. Tapping selects an element, dragging moves it; the buttons delete, duplicate, bring to front, undo and redo.
  4. 4At the bottom write a text and “Throw onto the slide” — it lands as a new text box on the slide in the editor.
  5. 5“Disconnect” ends the pairing for one device, “End pairing” for all.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Kurs-Studio
  • Part of the module “Course Studio”; switchable per tenant.

How it works#

Every edit is a command at the core. The second device sends commands — the same ones mouse and keyboard trigger — and states the state it was working on. The editor only executes a command if the device is accepted, the kind is allowed and the state is still current; afterwards it is in the history like any other step.

The connection runs via a broadcast channel without a table; only the state of the slide and commands go over the line, no personal data. The random room identifier in the QR code is the key.

What the second device may do#

  • move, scale, rotate, delete, duplicate, layer, align, change text
  • throw text onto the slide (text boxes only)
  • undo and redo in the editor's history
  • not: speakers, levers, chapters, live sources and templates — that stays in the editor

Who may do what#

Whoever is editing the slide in the editor can pair. The second device needs no account but may only see or do something after explicit acceptance; when the editor closes, the pairing ends.

Tips#

  • The editor is the truth: if the slide has just changed there, an action from the second device is discarded and the device gets the new state — then simply do it again.
  • Up to three devices at the same time; each must be accepted individually.
  • Images from the phone continue to come onto the slide via Beam.

Chapter 7

Community

Watching together, real-time group work, forum, study partners, mentoring, elections and the alumni network.

Watching together (live co-learning)

liveStudentsTeaching staff

Watch a course with several people: one starts the room and controls the slides, others join via a link and respond in real time.

Why#

You learn differently together: you ask questions you would not ask alone, and you keep at it.

How it works#

Click pathCourseLive co-learning

  1. 1In the course click “Live co-learning” at the top right — the live session starts, the button shows “Live”.
  2. 2“Copy” the displayed link and share it. Whoever opens it and is signed in sees the same slide: “You are watching live — the host controls the slides.” (Fig. 1)
    Fig. 1 “Live co-learning” is running: the link to copy, the number of co-learners and “End live session”.
    “Live co-learning” is running: the link to copy, the number of co-learners and “End live session”.

    Fig. 1 “Live co-learning” is running: the link to copy, the number of co-learners and “End live session”.

  3. 3Everyone can respond with symbols (thumbs up, light bulb, question mark, confetti, flame); the reactions float across the slide for everyone, plus the number of co-learners.
  4. 4“End live session” closes the room.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Gemeinsam schauen
  • Off: the button is missing in the course, and an existing link reports “Live co-learning is currently deactivated”.

Host and viewers#

  • The host starts the live session in their course and pages through; everyone else follows their slide.
  • Viewers control nothing — they respond and ask.
  • The reaction bar shows how many are currently co-learning; everyone sees reactions at the same time.
  • With the camera feature switched on, people additionally see each other.

Tips#

  • Viewers need an account; without signing in the link leads to the sign-in.
  • Until the host chooses a slide, the room says “Starting shortly”.

Camera in the watch-along room

liveStudentsTeaching staff

The participants' camera and microphone feeds as a strip in the watch-along room — with explicit consent, without recording.

Why#

Faces turn watching together into a meeting.

How it works#

Click pathWatch-along roomCamera

  1. 1Switch on the camera in the watch-along room. By switching it on you consent to the video and audio transmission to the co-learners.
  2. 2The images appear as a strip at the bottom right; your own is marked “(You)”.
  3. 3Camera and microphone can be toggled individually.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: Gemeinsam schauen
  • Default: off. Can be switched on per tenant.

Consent and data protection#

  • The camera is off until you switch it on yourself; switching it on is the consent to transmission to the co-learners in the room.
  • Image and sound only go live to the others in the room; nothing is recorded.
  • Camera and microphone can be switched off individually at any time.
  • For the institution the feature is separately switchable and off by default.

Tips#

  • Nothing is recorded — the images only go live to the others in the room.

Inviting co-learners

liveStudents

Invite up to four people to your own course — each gets ten days of free access, by email, text message, link or QR code.

Why#

Whoever learns something good wants to share it — with colleagues, friends, the team.

How it works#

Click pathCourseInvite

  1. 1In the course click “Invite” at the top right; the window “Invite co-learners” shows how many places are still free.
  2. 2Enter first name (required), last name and email address or mobile number and “Create invitation” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Invite co-learners”: free places, first name, last name, email or mobile number and “Create invitation”.
    “Invite co-learners”: free places, first name, last name, email or mobile number and “Create invitation”.

    Fig. 1 “Invite co-learners”: free places, first name, last name, email or mobile number and “Create invitation”.

  3. 3With an email address the invitation goes out immediately (“Email sent”); otherwise “Copy link”, send it as a text message or show the QR code.
  4. 4Whoever opens the link sees “Invitation to co-learn” and signs in or creates an account.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Community

What invited people get#

  • Ten days of free access with all learning features of the course.
  • Learning together in a live session with up to five people.
  • No final exam and no certificate in the free access.
  • 20 percent discount if they unlock the course later.

Whoever opens their own invitation link themselves sees a notice: this is your own link — share it with a co-learner.

Tips#

  • The free access includes no final exam and no certificate; whoever unlocks later gets a 20 percent discount.
  • A link is only valid once: expired, redeemed or withdrawn invitations say so when opened.

Group work

liveTeaching staffStudents

A shared real-time workspace with a method library (83 methods), timer, groups, voting, AI assistant, submission and assessment.

Why#

Group work succeeds with structure: a suitable method, a clear time, visible results. The workspace brings everything along and works in the lecture hall as well as online.

How it works#

Click pathGroup workNew workspace

  1. 1Open “Group work”: all workspaces you belong to, with status (in progress, submitted, assessed) (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 Your own workspaces with role and status: in progress, submitted or assessed.
    Your own workspaces with role and status: in progress, submitted or assessed.

    Fig. 1 Your own workspaces with role and status: in progress, submitted or assessed.

  2. 2Lecturers: “New workspace” — enter title and topic, optionally choose a course and divide the enrolled students into groups (people per group), then choose a method and “Form groups and start”.
  3. 3Or in the course at the slide “Group work” → “Choose and prepare method” — the slide becomes the topic.
  4. 4On the workspace: double-click creates a note; plus text, shapes, arrows, pen and images. Everyone sees changes immediately.
  5. 5The group submits (“Submit as group result”, optionally with an accompanying text); the facilitator assesses with a percentage and feedback or returns it to the group (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The side bar “Submission” on the workspace: status, accompanying text and “Submit as group result”.
    The side bar “Submission” on the workspace: status, accompanying text and “Submit as group result”.

    Fig. 2 The side bar “Submission” on the workspace: status, accompanying text and “Submit as group result”.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Gruppenarbeit

The method library#

83 methods — for example brainstorming, 6-3-5, SWOT, retrospective, decision matrix, world café — in categories such as problem solving & analysis, strategy & business, agile & team, learning & studying, research & science. The search finds methods by name; at a slide “Recommended for this slide” are at the top.

Every card shows what the method needs: several groups, rounds, hidden collecting, voting. Methods with several groups can only be created with groups via “Start group work”.

The facilitator's tools#

  • Timer with stop.
  • “Bring everyone to my view” — everyone sees the same part of the workspace.
  • Lock the workspace (only the facilitator writes), hide the others' notes (silent collecting), anonymous (no names on notes).
  • Voting with a fixed number of points per person.
  • Open group workspaces and add participants by email address.
  • Jigsaw: “Form home groups” — one expert from each group. Stations: “Everyone one station further”, hosts stay at the table.
  • “End sequence”.

The AI assistant on the workspace#

It reads the workspace, makes suggestions and stores the result as perfectly normal notes — anyone can move, change or delete them: first notes on the topic, fill the method's fields with prompts, sort notes by topic, summarise the result. The summary can be adopted into the accompanying text of the submission.

Processing in the EU; the notes are only transmitted for the respective request.

Taking the result with you#

Download the whole workspace as an image or as a PDF — without the others' mouse pointers.

Tips#

  • The method cards carry category colours and icons; the library is translated into fifteen languages.
  • Group work also runs in a course's full screen.
  • After submission the workspace is read-only for the group — that is why the platform asks beforehand.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Your own trial student is created automatically — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Fgruppenarbeit

Study partners

liveStudents

See up to six other learners at a similar level — only those who take part themselves see others and are seen.

Why#

Learning with a partner lasts longer. Reciprocity prevents anyone from just watching.

How it works#

Click pathDashboardStudy partners

  1. 1Switch on the study partner offer in the profile settings (default: invisible).
  2. 2Open “Study partners” in the dashboard.
  3. 3View up to six suggestions with names, completed modules and match in percent (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 Suggested study partners with completed modules and match in percent.
    Suggested study partners with completed modules and match in percent.

    Fig. 1 Suggested study partners with completed modules and match in percent.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Community

Data protection first#

  • By default you are invisible to others — this is intentional.
  • You only become visible with your own opt-in in the profile settings; only then do you see others too.
  • Name, completed modules and the match are shown — no contact details.
  • Making contact is not yet possible in this first stage.

Tips#

  • Only names and course progress of others who also take part are shown — no contact details.
  • Without a running course there are no suggestions; whoever takes part first sees a notice about this.

Under review#

A messaging feature between study partners is planned as the next step but not yet built.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Your own trial student is created automatically — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Fdashboard%2Fpeers

Community

liveStudentsTeaching staffAdministration

The institution's forum: raise concerns and vote, find mentoring, announce alumni events.

Why#

Participation needs a place. Concerns become visible, and the community decides what is important.

How it works#

Click pathDashboardCommunity

  1. 1Open “Community” in the dashboard (“Community & self-governance”).
  2. 2Under “Concerns & voting” raise a concern with a title and optional description; vote for other people's concerns (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Concerns & voting”: raised concerns with votes and the field for a new one.
    “Concerns & voting”: raised concerns with votes and the field for a new one.

    Fig. 1 “Concerns & voting”: raised concerns with votes and the field for a new one.

  3. 3Under “Peer mentoring & alumni” state whether you are a mentor (offering) or a mentee (looking), with a short note.
  4. 4Under “Alumni events” create an event (title, description, start, location, places) or register.
  5. 5At the top routes lead to “Student representation” (elections), “Alumni” and “Peer mentoring”.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Community

The areas of the community#

  • Concerns & voting — participation: raise concerns, vote.
  • Peer mentoring & alumni — offer or look for a mentor; route to the detailed mentoring page.
  • Alumni events — create, register, keep an eye on places.
  • Student representation — elections and candidacy.

Tips#

  • An event with all places taken is shown as “fully booked”; your own events are marked “by you”.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Your own trial student is created automatically — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Fcommunity

Mentoring

liveStudents

Experienced students and alumni accompany newcomers — become a mentor, find and request a mentor, accept and end mentorships.

Why#

Whoever is just starting benefits most from someone who has already walked the path.

How it works#

Click pathCommunityPeer mentoring

  1. 1In the community open “Peer mentoring — become or find a mentor”.
  2. 2Become a mentor: enter topics (separated by commas, e.g. “starting studies, exams”) and “About me in brief”, tick “visible as mentor” and save (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Become a mentor”: topics, “About me in brief” and “visible as mentor”.
    “Become a mentor”: topics, “About me in brief” and “visible as mentor”.

    Fig. 1 “Become a mentor”: topics, “About me in brief” and “visible as mentor”.

  3. 3Find a mentor: choose a mentor from the list, optionally write what it is about, and “Request” → “Send” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “Find a mentor”: mentors with their topics and “Request”.
    “Find a mentor”: mentors with their topics and “Request”.

    Fig. 2 “Find a mentor”: mentors with their topics and “Request”.

  4. 4Under “My mentorships”, as a mentor “accept” or “decline” requests; running mentorships can be “ended”.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Community

The course of a mentorship#

  • A mentor makes themselves visible with topics and a short introduction.
  • A mentee makes a request, optionally with a message.
  • The mentor accepts or declines.
  • Both sides can see a running mentorship under “My mentorships”; it can be ended.

Tips#

  • Whoever no longer wants to be found as a mentor unticks “visible as mentor” — running mentorships remain.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/betreuung

Student elections

liveStudentsAdministration

Elections of the student representation: stand as a candidate, vote secretly — one vote per election, results only after closing.

Why#

Self-governance needs a reliable, simple election.

How it works#

Click pathCommunityStudent representation

  1. 1In the community open “Student representation — elections & candidacy”.
  2. 2In an open election “+ Stand as a candidate” with a short statement — or “Cast vote” for a candidate (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 An open election with candidates, their statements and “Cast vote”.
    An open election with candidates, their statements and “Cast vote”.

    Fig. 1 An open election with candidates, their statements and “Cast vote”.

  3. 3After voting it says “voted ✓”; the result appears as soon as the election is closed.
  4. 4The operator opens and closes the election (“New election” with title and description, “Close election”).

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Hochschulverwaltung

The rules of the election#

  • One vote per election.
  • Secret: who voted for whom is not visible.
  • Results only appear once the election is closed.
  • Every student can stand as a candidate themselves, with a short statement.
  • Only the operator can open, close and reopen.

Tips#

  • The administration sees the committees in the campus under “Quality & governance” → “Committees”.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/gremien

Alumni

liveStudentsAdministration

The alumni network: whoever searches the directory is listed in it themselves — and decides themselves who sees them.

Why#

Alumni are one of a university's most important assets — for networking, showing and giving back. Reciprocity turns a card index into a network.

How it works#

Click pathDashboardAlumni network

  1. 1Open the card “Alumni network” in the dashboard.
  2. 2“Create profile”: “My time at the university” (degree, programme, graduation year), “Where I stand today” (position, company, location), “About me”, website and “What can I be approached for?”.
  3. 3Set who sees the profile — from “nobody” to “everyone”; the default is hidden.
  4. 4After that the directory is visible: search by programme, position, company or location (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 A profile in the alumni directory: degree, year, position, company, location and “What can I be approached for?”.
    A profile in the alumni directory: degree, year, position, company, location and “What can I be approached for?”.

    Fig. 1 A profile in the alumni directory: degree, year, position, company, location and “What can I be approached for?”.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Alumni & Karriere

What the alumni profile contains#

  • My time at the university — degree, programme, graduation year.
  • Where I stand today — position, company, location.
  • About me and website.
  • What can I be approached for? — “the actual engine of the network”.
  • Who sees me — nobody, other graduates, graduates and verified companies, or everyone.

Tips#

  • The database itself enforces the condition, not the page — it cannot be bypassed.
  • Companies only see a profile if they are verified; they can follow, but get no further access through it.
  • “Delete profile” removes the profile completely from the directory.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Your own trial student is created automatically — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Falumni

Chapter 8

People Development

For companies and for the staff of a university: onboarding journeys, mandatory training with refreshers, competency matrix, the manager's view and training records.

People development at a glance

liveAdministrationStudents

Learning paths, assignments with deadlines and every employee's own area — the basic surface of people development.

Why#

Companies and the staff of a university need further training with commitment: who must have learned what by when?

How it works#

Click pathPeople developmentOverview

  1. 1Employees: open “People development” — “My area” shows your own onboarding, mandatory training with records, further learning paths, the contact persons and the competencies (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “My area”: your own onboarding as a learning path with phases and steps.
    “My area”: your own onboarding as a learning path with phases and steps.

    Fig. 1 “My area”: your own onboarding as a learning path with phases and steps.

  2. 2Managers: “My team” shows the people they lead.
  3. 3HR department: open “Overview” — at the top the key figures, below them what needs to be done (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The HR department's key figures: active employees, running onboardings, mandatory fulfilled and overdue.
    The HR department's key figures: active employees, running onboardings, mandatory fulfilled and overdue.

    Fig. 2 The HR department's key figures: active employees, running onboardings, mandatory fulfilled and overdue.

  4. 4Use the bar to go to “Learning paths”, “Assignments”, “Mandatory training”, “Competencies” and “Workforce” (Fig. 3).
    Fig. 3 “Overdue”: who is behind the deadline with which learning path.
    “Overdue”: who is behind the deadline with which learning path.

    Fig. 3 “Overdue”: who is behind the deadline with which learning path.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Personal & Weiterbildung
  • Off: the whole of people development is missing.
  • The bar only shows what is switched on: without “Onboarding journeys” there are no onboarding paths, without “Mandatory training” no tab for it.

The HR department's overview#

  • Key figures: active employees (linked to a sign-in), running onboardings, mandatory training fulfilled (in percent), assignments overdue.
  • Overdue — who is behind the deadline with an assignment.
  • Records expiring — what expires in the next 30 days. 30 days before expiry the refresher starts automatically.
  • New in the company without onboarding — with the button “Assign onboarding”.
  • Early warning from the feedback — conversations with 1 or 2 stars.
  • Reports for auditors: mandatory training, all assignments and the change log as CSV.

My area (for every employee)#

  • Onboarding as a journey with phases and steps to tick off.
  • Mandatory training with status and “View record”.
  • Further learning paths and “Completed” with records.
  • Contact persons (manager, buddy, mentor) and “You are accompanying”, if you are a buddy yourself.
  • Competencies: assess yourself — the manager sees the assessment.

Tips#

  • Completed courses are transferred into people development overnight — or immediately with “Reconcile now”.
  • The administration of people development is reserved for the HR department; employees see a notice about it instead.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Opens the demo role with fictitious sample data — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/enter?persona=personal&next=%2Fakademie%2Fverwaltung

Learning paths and templates

liveAdministration

A learning path is a sequence of steps with deadlines and owners — for onboarding, mandatory training or further development; common paths are available as templates.

Why#

What someone is to learn or do must be described properly once — then it can be given to many and proven the same way for all.

How it works#

Click pathPeople developmentLearning pathsNew learning path

  1. 1Open “People development” → “Learning paths”. The paths are listed by type: onboarding, mandatory training, further development (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The learning paths of one type with target group, deadline, number of steps and status.
    The learning paths of one type with target group, deadline, number of steps and status.

    Fig. 1 The learning paths of one type with target group, deadline, number of steps and status.

  2. 2At the bottom, under the templates, “Adopt” a common path — or “New learning path” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The templates of common learning paths to adopt.
    The templates of common learning paths to adopt.

    Fig. 2 The templates of common learning paths to adopt.

  3. 3Enter title, description, deadline in days from the start, for mandatory training “Valid for months (then refresher)” and the legal basis.
  4. 4Choose the target group (unit, role) and tick “Assign automatically” if desired.
  5. 5Create steps: “What needs to be done?”, owner, phase or day, a published course from the workshop or a link, optionally “Conveys competency … up to level” and “Mandatory step”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The included templates#

  • Onboarding — the first 90 days
  • Onboarding for new managers
  • Data protection instruction (valid 12 months)
  • Information security and phishing (valid 12 months)
  • Occupational safety instruction (valid 12 months)
  • AI competence in the company (valid 24 months)
  • Equal treatment in the workplace (valid 24 months)
  • From colleague to manager

Who can be responsible for a step#

This way “Provide laptop” lands with IT and “Conversation on day 30” with the manager — everyone sees their own steps.

  • Employee
  • Manager
  • Buddy
  • HR
  • IT

Tips#

  • Automatic paths go once to every active employee of the target group — including new ones; for onboarding from the date of joining.
  • Deadlines and legal bases of the templates are suggestions — please check them in your own company.
  • “Archive” removes a path from the offering; running assignments and records are preserved.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Opens the demo role with fictitious sample data — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/enter?persona=personal&next=%2Fakademie%2Fverwaltung%2Fpfade

Assignments with deadline, buddy and mentor

liveAdministration

Give learning paths to individual people, whole units or roles — with start, deadline, buddy and mentor; overdue ones at a glance.

Why#

Further training only becomes binding with a name and a date. The assignment records both and shows who is behind.

How it works#

Click pathPeople developmentAssignments

  1. 1Open “People development” → “Assignments”.
  2. 2Choose a learning path and “To whom?”: “Individual people”, “Whole unit” or “Whole role” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Assign”: learning path, “To whom?”, start, buddy and mentor.
    “Assign”: learning path, “To whom?”, start, buddy and mentor.

    Fig. 1 “Assign”: learning path, “To whom?”, start, buddy and mentor.

  3. 3Set the start (empty for onboarding: the date of joining), optionally choose a buddy and a mentor and assign.
  4. 4Filter the list by type, “overdue”, “completed” or “all” and search by name (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The assignments with person, learning path, deadline, progress, “Remind” and “Withdraw”.
    The assignments with person, learning path, deadline, progress, “Remind” and “Withdraw”.

    Fig. 2 The assignments with person, learning path, deadline, progress, “Remind” and “Withdraw”.

  5. 5For each assignment expand “Steps and support”, “Remind” or “Withdraw”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The status of an assignment#

  • Open
  • In progress
  • Completed
  • Cancelled

Completed course steps are taken over from the course — automatically overnight or immediately via “Reconcile now” in the overview.

Tips#

  • “Remind” reports back how many emails were sent and how many remained without a deliverable address.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Opens the demo role with fictitious sample data — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/enter?persona=personal&next=%2Fakademie%2Fverwaltung%2Fzuweisungen

Onboarding journeys

liveAdministrationStudents

Onboarding by role and department: before the first day, day 1, first week, up to day 30/60/90 — with buddy, mentor and conversations with feedback.

Why#

The first weeks decide whether someone stays. A planned journey ensures that nothing is forgotten and problems are noticed early.

How it works#

Click pathPeople developmentMy area

  1. 1Under “Learning paths” the HR department creates a path of the type “Onboarding” (or adopts the template “Onboarding – the first 90 days”) and assigns it — automatically per unit or role or individually.
  2. 2New employees see their journey by phases under “My area” and tick off steps; a course step opens the course (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 An onboarding in “My area”: phases, steps to tick off and a course as a step.
    An onboarding in “My area”: phases, steps to tick off and a course as a step.

    Fig. 1 An onboarding in “My area”: phases, steps to tick off and a course as a step.

  3. 3After 30, 60 and 90 days a short conversation asks “How is your onboarding going?” — rating from 1 to 5 and a free text. The manager adds their view.
  4. 4Feedback with 1 or 2 stars appears as an early warning in the HR department's overview.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Mitarbeiter-Onboarding

The phases#

  • Before the first day — up to 60 days beforehand; preparatory items deliberately come before that.
  • Day 1
  • First week — day 1 to 6
  • Up to day 30
  • Up to day 60
  • Up to day 90

If a step has no phase of its own, it follows from its day relative to the start.

Tips#

  • New employees without onboarding appear in the overview under “New in the company without onboarding” — with a button for assigning.

Mandatory training & refreshers

liveAdministration

Mandatory instruction with validity, automatic refresher 30 days before expiry, fulfilment status per employee and audit report as CSV.

Why#

Data protection, occupational safety, compliance: in an audit you must be able to prove who was instructed when.

How it works#

Click pathPeople developmentMandatory training

  1. 1Open “People development” → “Mandatory training”.
  2. 2If a training is missing, “Adopt from template” or create a path of the type “Mandatory training” with validity in months under “Learning paths” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The mandatory training with validity and fulfilment rate.
    The mandatory training with validity and fulfilment rate.

    Fig. 1 The mandatory training with validity and fulfilment rate.

  3. 3The table shows the fulfilment status per employee and training; filter by unit or choose “Action required only” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The fulfilment status per employee and training.
    The fulfilment status per employee and training.

    Fig. 2 The fulfilment status per employee and training.

  4. 4Download “Audit report (CSV)” — every cycle with record code and the reminders sent.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Mitarbeiter-Onboarding

The cycle of a mandatory training#

  • Assignment with deadline (from the learning path).
  • Completion → signed record with validity in months.
  • 30 days before expiry: new cycle, announced once; the employee is reminded.
  • The audit report lists every cycle with record code and the reminders.

Included templates: data protection, information security, occupational safety (12 months each), AI competence and equal treatment (24 months each) — each with a legal basis as a suggestion.

Tips#

  • The refresher starts by itself 30 days before expiry: a new cycle is assigned and announced once.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Opens the demo role with fictitious sample data — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/enter?persona=personal&next=%2Fakademie%2Fverwaltung%2Fpflicht

Competency matrix & gap analysis

liveAdministration

Competencies per role with a target level, the current level per employee, gaps and the learning paths that close them.

Why#

Further training should close gaps, not fill catalogues.

How it works#

Click pathPeople developmentCompetencies

  1. 1Open “People development” → “Competencies”.
  2. 2Create a “New competency” and set under “Target per role” which competency a role needs at which level (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The competency catalogue with category and “New competency”.
    The competency catalogue with category and “New competency”.

    Fig. 1 The competency catalogue with category and “New competency”.

  3. 3Under “Current level of employees” see the levels: outlined in yellow is what is below the role's target.
  4. 4For each competency the page shows the coverage and which learning path conveys the required level — or “no learning path conveys this level” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The gap analysis: who is below the target of their role and which learning path conveys the level.
    The gap analysis: who is below the target of their role and which learning path conveys the level.

    Fig. 2 The gap analysis: who is below the target of their role and which learning path conveys the level.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Personal & Weiterbildung

The levels#

  • 0 — None
  • 1 — Basics
  • 2 — Applying
  • 3 — Advanced
  • 4 — Expert

Tips#

  • Completed learning paths raise the level automatically; employees assess themselves, managers confirm.
  • The matrix only knows employees with a role — without a role there is no target.
  • The competence diagnosis in courses is deliberately NOT connected to this matrix: evidence from courses never flows into HR views.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Opens the demo role with fictitious sample data — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/enter?persona=personal&next=%2Fakademie%2Fverwaltung%2Fkompetenzen

Workforce, units & import

liveAdministration

Employees with unit, role and manager, the organisational units and the bulk import via CSV.

Why#

Without structure no assignment: who belongs where, who leads whom. From this follow automatic learning paths, the manager's view and the target values of the competencies.

How it works#

Click pathPeople developmentWorkforce

  1. 1Open “People development” → “Workforce”; three tabs: employees, units, roles.
  2. 2“Create employee” or search; per person unit, role, position, date of joining and manager (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The employees with unit, role, position, date of joining and manager.
    The employees with unit, role, position, date of joining and manager.

    Fig. 1 The employees with unit, role, position, date of joining and manager.

  3. 3Under “Units” create divisions, departments, teams and locations with a parent unit and a head.
  4. 4Under “Roles” create the roles to which the competency target values are attached.
  5. 5“Bulk import (CSV)”: choose or paste a file, check the preview and adopt it.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Personal & Weiterbildung

The bulk import#

  • Columns: first name, last name, email, personnel number, unit, role, position, date of joining, manager (email), employment.
  • Separator: semicolon, comma or tab; at most 2 MB.
  • Existing employees (same email address or personnel number) are updated, missing units and roles are created.
  • The preview shows rows with errors — they are not imported — and ignored columns.

Tips#

  • A sign-in is linked as soon as someone with the same email address signs in at this company.
  • The head of a unit sees all their employees under “My team”.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Opens the demo role with fictitious sample data — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/enter?persona=personal&next=%2Fakademie%2Fverwaltung%2Fbelegschaft

The manager's view

liveAdministration

Managers see their team's onboarding, mandatory training and competencies, send reminders and write their feedback on the onboarding.

Why#

Onboarding is a management task. The manager sees where their team stands — and only their team.

How it works#

Click pathPeople developmentMy team

  1. 1Open “People development” → “My team”.
  2. 2At the top: running learning paths, who is behind, mandatory fulfilled (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “My team”: team members, running learning paths, overdue and mandatory fulfilled.
    “My team”: team members, running learning paths, overdue and mandatory fulfilled.

    Fig. 1 “My team”: team members, running learning paths, overdue and mandatory fulfilled.

  3. 3For each person expand the learning paths (“Steps and feedback”) and “Remind” if needed (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 A person in the team with their learning paths, steps and feedback.
    A person in the team with their learning paths, steps and feedback.

    Fig. 2 A person in the team with their learning paths, steps and feedback.

  4. 4Tick off your own steps (e.g. the conversation on day 30) and write the feedback on the onboarding.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Mitarbeiter-Onboarding

What the manager sees — and what not#

  • Per person: running learning paths with steps, delays, mandatory training, competencies and the feedback on the onboarding.
  • The employees' self-assessment of competencies — for confirmation.
  • Not: evidence from the competence diagnosis in courses. It never flows into HR views.

Tips#

  • Who belongs to a team follows from the workforce: the registered manager or the head of the unit.

Reminders by email

liveAdministration

A daily run sends a reminder one week before the deadline and weekly afterwards; when overdue, the manager is reminded too.

Why#

Deadlines only help if someone reminds people of them.

How it works#

  1. 1Nothing to do: a daily run sends the reminders by itself.
  2. 2By hand: under “Assignments” or “My team” click “Remind”.
  3. 3If the feature is off, the deadlines remain visible, only no emails are sent.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Mitarbeiter-Onboarding

What the daily run does — in this order#

  • Take over course completions (nobody is reminded of something they finished yesterday).
  • Assign new employees their automatic learning paths.
  • Expiring mandatory training: open the next cycle.
  • Remind: “due soon” once, seven days before the deadline; “overdue” every seven days after the deadline, then also to the manager; a new refresher cycle announces itself once.

Test addresses and accounts without an email address receive nothing — they are noted as “skipped”.

Tips#

  • Every attempt — sent, skipped, failed — is logged; the log is in the audit report.

Training records

liveAdministrationStudents

After completion a signed record with a verification code, a public verification page and a validity date.

Why#

In an audit by an authority or a client, what counts is a record that anyone can verify.

How it works#

Click pathPeople developmentMy areaView record

  1. 1After completing a training the record is available under “My area” (“View record”).
  2. 2The verification code leads to the public verification page “Training record”: holder, training, completed on, valid until, issued by (company and country), verification code.
  3. 3The page shows whether the digital signature has been verified; the record can be downloaded as a verifiable credential.
  4. 4Before expiry the refresher assigns the training again.
  5. 5HR: under “Learning paths” → “Issuer in records” choose the company's country. The name comes from the company data.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Mitarbeiter-Onboarding
  • In the signed record the company appears as the issuing body — with name and country. It is secured via the platform's identifier; the company needs no key of its own.
  • Without a chosen country only the name appears in the record. Older records remain valid and show the name as before.

The public verification page#

  • Holder, training, completed on, valid until, issued by (company, country), verification code.
  • Name and country of the issuing body come from the signed record — only with a verified signature.
  • Whether the training is still valid.
  • Whether the digital signature has been verified and is valid.
  • The record as a verifiable credential to download — for auditors who want to verify it by machine.

Human resources

liveAdministration

Master data of all employees; onboarding checklists, positions & organisation, contracts and absence build on it.

Why#

One place for the staff's master data — the basis for everything else.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationHuman resources

  1. 1Open “Human resources”. At the top the key figures (total employees, active, departments) (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The key figures: total employees, active and number of departments.
    The key figures: total employees, active and number of departments.

    Fig. 1 The key figures: total employees, active and number of departments.

  2. 2“Create employee”: first name, last name, personnel number, department, employment, date of joining and status are required; plus position, email, phone, date of leaving, weekly hours, notes.
  3. 3Search by name, personnel number or email; filter by department and status (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The employee list with personnel number, department, employment, date of joining and status.
    The employee list with personnel number, department, employment, date of joining and status.

    Fig. 2 The employee list with personnel number, department, employment, date of joining and status.

  4. 4Use the buttons at the top to go to “Onboarding”, “Positions & org”, “Contracts” and “Absence”.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Personal & Weiterbildung

The four sub-pages#

  • Onboarding — checklists per person; dates depend on the date of joining or leaving, preparatory items deliberately come before. At the top running checklists, overdue steps and backlog.
  • Positions & org — positions with title, department, places and status; assignment of employees to position and superior; from this the organisational structure.
  • Contracts — contract type, title or role, remuneration, amount, weekly hours, start and end; at the top the annual personnel costs of the active contracts.
  • Absence — enter period and reason; working days (Monday to Friday) are counted against entitlement and remaining days; “Approve” or “Reject” requests.

“Human resources” is the personnel administration, “People development” the further training of the workforce. Both have their own switches.

Competence continuity

in progressStudentsAdministration

Short competence prompts per role, via QR code or reminder: the platform records when a competence was last shown, when it is due again and how current it is.

Why#

Competence fades when it is not used. Instead of an annual mandatory training, a short prompt of a few minutes checks exactly the competence that is currently due — with the same competence diagnosis as in the course.

How it works#

Click pathPeople developmentMy competences

  1. 1Company administrator: under “Competence continuity” choose a role, define the expected competences with level, priority and rhythm and activate the version. “Create example” creates the role “Sales employee using AI” with five competences.
  2. 2Under “Accesses” create a QR code (for the role or a single competence, time-limited) and post or send it. The code contains nothing personal and can be revoked at any time.
  3. 3Employee: scan the QR code or open “My competences”, sign in and start “My prompt for today” — a question or a task from practice, spoken if desired.
  4. 4Afterwards the platform shows the result with a justification, the currency status and the next date. If there is a gap, “My competence companion” leads to the matching place in the course.
  5. 5“My development” shows the history, “My records” the evidence; the competence passport can be downloaded as a file.
  6. 6Under “Analysis” the company only sees aggregated figures from a minimum group — never an individual person.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: Kompetenzbegleitung
  • Per tenant via the feature “Competence continuity” (default off) or the bookable module “Competence continuity”; requires the competence check.
  • Under “Prompts & quotas” every value can be set per company; without changes the default values apply.
  • Minimum group of the analysis: default 5, larger possible, never smaller.
  • Reminders per person and week (default 1, at most 7), default rhythm for new requirements (default monthly).
  • Rules for resubmission: base interval per rhythm, factors for risk, demanding competences and stability, days until learning step and check task, shortest and longest interval, threshold for “reassessment”.
  • Override the rhythm per role, per competence or per competence in a role — without a new version of the role profile; the most specific setting applies.
  • Validity of new QR codes (default 90 days, at most 365), throttling of new prompts per person and day (default no limit).
  • Monthly quotas for prompts, AI tokens and speech minutes; reading aloud with the course voice on or off.
  • Every change appears with old and new value in the administration log.
  • Every employee continues to choose rhythm, pause and email reminders themselves; this choice only pushes dates back.

The four currency states#

  • Currently demonstrated — an independent piece of evidence lies within the rhythm.
  • Refresher recommended — the rhythm has expired; what was shown earlier remains visible and still counts as shown.
  • Reassessment recommended — for example after an identified gap or a changed requirement of the role.
  • Not sufficiently evidenced — there is no independent evidence yet.

An expired rhythm is not a loss of the competence; the status is never downgraded automatically.

When a prompt becomes due#

Resubmission follows comprehensible, configurable rules: last evidence, difficulty, identified gaps, the risk class of the activity, changed content or requirements, previous results and your own reminder preference. Daily, weekly, monthly or event-driven — daily use is never the default.

The rules are not a prediction of forgetting; they are deliberately simple and visible to everyone.

The company can adjust the rules within fixed limits (for example risk factor “high” from 0.5 to 0.7). Every plan states the rule version according to which it was calculated; a change recalculates nothing retroactively, it takes effect at the next calculation.

What the company sees — and what not#

  • Only aggregated figures from a minimum group of five people; filters that together would result in a smaller group are rejected. The minimum group can be increased, never reduced below five.
  • No individual answers, no individual assessments, no rankings.
  • The purpose is exclusively learning and development; performance appraisal, applicant selection or personnel decisions are excluded.
  • QR codes contain nothing personal, are time-limited and can be revoked at any time.

Tips#

  • An exercise in learning mode does not count as independent evidence.
  • When a resubmission expires, nothing is downgraded: the status is then “Refresher recommended”, what was shown earlier remains visible.
  • Competence continuity serves only learning and development — not performance appraisal.

Under review#

Built; the database changes (migrations 367 and 369) have not yet been applied and acceptance with real models is pending. Decided (17.10.2026): default values remain, every value can be set per company. Open: view for managers.

Chapter 9

Operations & Administration (Control)

The entire admin back end: switch every feature on and off per tenant, book modules, accounts and permissions, costs and usage, data protection, audit, interfaces, support — every page of the administration is described here. Plus the handbook itself, the glossary and the public knowledge section.

Feature catalogue: switch every feature per tenant

liveOperator

Every feature of the platform can be switched on and off for all customers or for a single customer — off means: not there, not just greyed out.

Why#

Not every customer wants everything. A university needs admission and an examinations office, a company needs mandatory training and onboarding. The catalogue turns the platform into exactly the product a customer has booked.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationControlPlatform or tenant

  1. 1Open “Control” (operator only).
  2. 2At the top choose the view: “Platform” (the house rule for every customer without an exception of their own) or a tenant.
  3. 3In the platform view switch each feature on or off; every row shows how many tenants deviate from it (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The platform view of Control: a group of features, each with a switch and the number of tenants that deviate.
    The platform view of Control: a group of features, each with a switch and the number of tenants that deviate.

    Fig. 1 The platform view of Control: a group of features, each with a switch and the number of tenants that deviate.

  4. 4In the tenant view choose one of three values per feature: “as platform”, “on” or “off”.
  5. 5Booking happens per customer under “Modules & prices”; a module sets the switches that belong to it. This is the fine control.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The areas of the catalogue#

  • Learning · Learning tools in the player · Didactics
  • Community
  • Credentials & exams · Studies & admission · Teaching
  • Workshop & avatar
  • University administration · People development
  • Languages · Support · Interfaces

Every feature of this catalogue has an entry in this handbook — an automatic guard checks this on every test run.

How a switch works#

  • Pages: the root layout asks on every page which features govern the path; if one of them is off, “not found” comes back.
  • Interfaces: the upstream proxy answers with “Feature not active” for switched-off features.
  • Navigation: menu items of switched-off features disappear.
  • Tools without their own page (e.g. flashcards in the player) simply do not appear.

Where the values are stored#

The catalogue itself is source code — every feature with area, default, description and the paths it governs. The values (on/off per platform and per tenant) are in the database and can be changed without a new deployment. Every change is logged.

Who may do what#

  • Switching — for the platform and for every tenant: only the operator (page “Feature flags” or “Control”, address /admin/features).
  • A customer's administration does not switch itself; it requests modules under “Booked modules”.
  • Demo mode can additionally only switch off, never on — and only in your own browser.

Tips#

  • A switched-off feature answers on its pages with “not found” and likewise on its interfaces — it cannot be reached via its address.
  • A path is locked as soon as one of its features is off: whoever only switches off office hours keeps the lecturer area; whoever switches off the lecturer area also loses office hours.
  • The state is cached for 30 seconds per tenant; a change therefore takes effect after half a minute at the latest.

Modules & prices

liveOperatorAdministration

Per customer a package of bookable modules with prices — booking sets the switches of the feature catalogue, dependencies are booked along, every change is in the history.

Why#

A university is sold something different from a company. Module management is the one screen per customer: what they book, what they pay for it, from when — and who changed it when.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationModules & pricesChoose customer

  1. 1In the administration open “Modules & prices” and choose a customer at the top under “Customer” (“Choose customer …”). After the name it says how many open requests they have.
  2. 2Section 1 “Choose package”: a click on “University”, “Company – onboarding” or “Further education provider” sets a sensible basic configuration; every card shows the price per user and month (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Choose package”: university, company – onboarding and further education provider, each with a price per user and month.
    “Choose package”: university, company – onboarding and further education provider, each with a price per user and month.

    Fig. 1 “Choose package”: university, company – onboarding and further education provider, each with a price per user and month.

  3. 3Section 2 “Modules”: switch every module on or off individually. The price chip opens the field “Price for this customer in €”; “List price …” resets it. “+ Usage” names what comes on top according to usage, “requires …” the dependencies.
  4. 4Section 3 “Contract”: enter “Users (agreed seats)”, “Discount in %”, “Term” (monthly, 12, 24 or 36 months) and “Billing from” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “Contract”: agreed seats, discount, term and start of billing.
    “Contract”: agreed seats, discount, term and start of billing.

    Fig. 2 “Contract”: agreed seats, discount, term and start of billing.

  5. 5On the right check the summary “Customer pays” and choose “… review changes” (for a new customer “Set up”).
  6. 6In the confirmation window read the before/after comparison and “Apply” — or “Cancel”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

  • The learning platform is mandatory and always booked (“always included”).
  • Modules marked “in preparation” can be booked and are priced so that contracts can already include them; but they do not yet switch any feature.
  • A booked module sets exactly the switches of the feature catalogue that belong to it — fine control of individual features remains possible under “Control”.

The modules by category#

  • Foundation — learning platform (mandatory), multilingualism
  • Learning — learning tools, podcasts, interactive learning, learning workshop
  • AI & avatar — AI tutor, role play (requires the AI tutor), avatar lecturer (by minutes), own avatars (requires the avatar lecturer)
  • Collaboration — group work, community, watching together
  • Exams & credentials — exams, competence check, exam proctoring (requires exams), certificates & badges
  • University — application & admission, university administration, lecturer area, alumni & careers
  • Companies & HR — HR & further training, employee onboarding (requires HR & further training)
  • Creation — Course Studio (with the slide editor and the choice of text models)
  • Connectivity — interfaces

Three kinds of prices#

  • Per user and month — calculated with the number of agreed seats.
  • Flat rate per month — independent of the number of users.
  • By usage — the avatar minute at a fixed rate; other AI services as cost price times a mark-up. The summary shows an estimated amount for this (“Usage (estimated)”); the measured usage is billed.

The summary shows: modules per user × seats, flat rate, discount, usage (estimated) — and at the top the effective price per user and month.

The customer's view: “Booked modules”#

A customer's administration sees its own contract under “Booked modules” (address /dashboard/module): “Your modules”, “You pay … per user / month”, term and start of billing. Under “Book additionally” it chooses a module, sees the price beforehand and sends “Send request”. Nothing is booked without the operator — the request appears in the operator's module management.

If the contract has not yet been set up, it says: “Your contract is being set up. Your provider will contact you.”

Who may do what#

  • Operator: set modules, prices and contract of every customer, accept or decline requests.
  • The customer's administration (HR management or university administration with an organisation): read their own contract and request modules — not book them.
  • Every saved change is in the “History” with time, person and price before → after.

Tips#

  • The prices in the catalogue are guide prices. A deviating price appears as a coloured chip — so you see at a glance where a customer has special conditions.
  • Whoever switches off a module on which another depends gets the notice “Without … , … is switched off too.” — before saving.
  • Customers request modules themselves (see below). Open requests are shown at the top above the packages with “Decline” and “Accept & book”.

Demo mode (button “Features”)

liveOperator

For a demonstration the operator hides features only in their own browser — without changing anything in a customer's settings.

Why#

You do not show a company student elections, or a university employee onboarding. Demo mode slims down the platform for the duration of a demonstration — and still leaves everything there to show it on request.

How it works#

Click pathHeaderFeatures

  1. 1When signed in as operator, the floating button “Features” appears at the top right. It can be moved by the handle on the left; the browser remembers the position.
  2. 2Open the button: the window “Features in the demo” lists all features by area (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Features in the demo”: all features by area to tick, at the top the presets.
    “Features in the demo”: all features by area to tick, at the top the presets.

    Fig. 1 “Features in the demo”: all features by area to tick, at the top the presets.

  3. 3Remove a tick — the feature is gone immediately in this browser, including pages, menu items and tools. The number on the button says how many are hidden.
  4. 4Presets: “Everything on” removes every hiding; “Company compact” hides what a company does not need.
  5. 5Close the window with “Close” (×); the choice remains until it is changed.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

  • Features that are off anyway for the chosen organisation are listed with the note “off for this organisation” — demo mode cannot switch them on.
  • Applies only to this browser: the choice is kept for up to 30 days as a small marker (cookie) in the browser; nothing is stored in the database.

What “Company compact” hides#

  • the areas “Learning tools in the player”, “Studies & admission” and “University administration” entirely
  • plus individually: podcasts, mastery, ECTS overview, group work, community, student elections, alumni, mentoring, study partners, examinations office, exam proctoring, achievement archive, lecturer area and office hours

Demo mode or feature catalogue?#

The feature catalogue under “Control” decides bindingly for a customer what exists — for all their users, saved and logged. Demo mode only takes something away additionally in one browser. What the catalogue has switched off stays off.

Who sees the button#

Only the operator. On surfaces that are entirely in a customer's corporate design and must not look like the platform (such as a customer's product presentation), the button does not appear.

Tips#

  • Safe because the mode can only switch off: it names features that should be off; it cannot switch anything on, and it does not affect other users.
  • Before a demonstration choose “Company compact” and then tick individual features again that are to be talked about.

Tenants & brand

liveOperatorAdministration

Create new customers with their own address, their own corporate design and their own modules — one platform, many organisations, strictly separated data.

Why#

Every university and every company should experience the platform as their own: their own colours, their own logo, their own address, their own legal texts. The data is nevertheless strictly separated.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationTenants

  1. 1As operator open the page “Tenants” (address /plattform/mandanten; from the administration home page via the tile “Tenants”).
  2. 2Every row shows logo, name, address, house colour and “booked / all modules”. “Open” shows the organisation as its people see it; “Set up brand” opens this tenant's brand workshop.
  3. 3At the bottom “Create new tenant”: enter “Name of the organisation” and “Address” (the identifier before the main domain), then “Create and set up brand”. The message says whether the address was set up — the certificate follows after about a minute.
  4. 4In the brand workshop: logo, colours for surfaces and buttons, slide colours, font (or a font file of your own), home page and legal texts of the organisation (imprint, privacy policy). The preview on the right shows the real building blocks with the current values (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The preview of the brand workshop: the real building blocks with the organisation's logo, colours and font.
    The preview of the brand workshop: the real building blocks with the organisation's logo, colours and font.

    Fig. 1 The preview of the brand workshop: the real building blocks with the organisation's logo, colours and font.

  5. 5“Apply brand” saves; the organisation's people see the new brand immediately.
  6. 6Set up modules and prices of the new tenant under “Modules & prices”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

  • A customer instance of its own (own database, own deployment) is created via a single switch of the software; which administration pages it delivers follows from the “Assignment of administration surfaces”.

What the brand workshop sets#

  • Logo and name of the organisation, header and font in the header
  • House colour (buttons, links, highlights) and text on the house colour
  • Surfaces: page background, cards, muted surfaces and text, accent surface, borders, button colour
  • Slides (workshop): slide background, slide text, slide heading
  • Font: body text and headings from a selection or as a file of your own; base size, heading scale, corner rounding
  • Home page of the organisation and its legal texts (imprint, privacy policy) — apply as soon as the address is set up

Who may do what#

  • Create tenants and set up the brand for every tenant: only the operator.
  • An organisation's administration can open the brand workshop for its own organisation (address /plattform/marke) — it cannot choose another organisation.

The brand workshop is deliberately not part of the administration's day-to-day business: a brand is set up once and then rarely again.

Tips#

  • Derive the brand from what exists: “Fetch suggestions” reads colours from the organisation's website, “Choose template” from a presentation template, “Choose slide images” from sample slides. Nothing is adopted until saving.
  • A course carries the brand of the organisation it names — not that of the host it is currently running on.
  • If setting up the address fails, the tenant is still created; the message states the reason instead of hiding it.

Costs, usage & controlling

liveOperator

Monthly costs and revenue, usage per student and customer, the derivation of the rendering costs and the controlling cockpit with the state of the university.

Why#

AI costs money per call. Whoever does not see costs only notices a session that is getting out of hand from the invoice — and whoever does not have the state of the university on one screen steers by gut feeling.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationCosts

  1. 1“Costs” (cost dashboard): at the top revenue, costs, margin and active users of the month; below that “Costs per service”, “Detail by purpose”, “Top 5 cost-causing sessions” and “Limit triggers this period” (80 %, 95 %, 100 % · blocked) (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 Revenue, costs, margin and active users of the month.
    Revenue, costs, margin and active users of the month.

    Fig. 1 Revenue, costs, margin and active users of the month.

  2. 2“Usage”: usage per student in the period — occupied seats as the billing basis, streaming and dialogue minutes, average per student, characters and costs of speech output, messages; below that the breakdown by customer and “Export CSV”.
  3. 3“Controlling”: the “State of the university” — admission funnel (applications, decided, admitted, enrolled) and key figures on admission, students, success & teaching, operations & certificates, seats, slide analytics and finances (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The admission funnel in controlling: applications, decided, admitted, enrolled.
    The admission funnel in controlling: applications, decided, admitted, enrolled.

    Fig. 2 The admission funnel in controlling: applications, decided, admitted, enrolled.

  4. 4From there “Slide analytics”: choose a course and read per slide reached, dwell time (median), drop-off, questions correct and role-play average of the last 90 days.
  5. 5“How the rendering costs arise” (from the workshop's language choice, link “How do these costs arise?”): the calculation slides × video minutes × languages × rate per computing minute, step by step.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Usage: the basis of the invoice#

Streaming minutes (presentation), dialogue minutes (conversation with the avatar) and the number of students are billed. Test seats are listed separately and are not charged.

The breakdown by customer is the reason why usage is recorded separately at all: every row is a billing basis of its own. The organisation is on the usage row itself — if a student changes university, their past usage does not move with them.

The monthly report goes to the billing office automatically on the 1st of every month; a button sends the current interim figures immediately.

The key figures of controlling#

  • Admission — total applications, admitted, rejected, acceptance rate
  • Students — total, actively studying, graduated
  • Success & teaching — active courses, assessed achievements, pass rate, ECTS awarded
  • Operations & certificates — certificates issued, organisations
  • Seats — agreed, occupied, utilisation, customers at the limit, billed in the month, test seats
  • Usage — streaming and dialogue minutes in total and per student, costs of the month, active students
  • Slide analytics — slide views and answers at the slide anchor of the last 30 days
  • Finances — fees & lecturer fees, revenue & costs

Accounts of the public tour are not students of the university and are not counted. Where a figure was cut off at an upper limit, a warning is shown.

Who may do what#

Costs, usage, controlling, slide analytics and rendering costs are operations surfaces: every page requires the operator role by itself. A university's administration does not see them — its own figures are in Statistics and Booked modules.

Tips#

  • If a source is missing (such as the payment service's revenue), the reason is shown at the top of the page — never a silent zero. The costs come entirely from the platform's own recording and remain visible.
  • Every call to an external AI or speech service goes through one single recording point; that is why the figures on these pages match.
  • Costs in dollars are converted at the European Central Bank's daily reference rate; the header says whether the rate is fresh, older or a fallback value.
  • The “demo rate” of the rendering costs applies only in your own browser and only to the display in the workshop — real costs and billing remain unaffected.

IT control centre

liveOperator

The operational view in real time: database, avatar machines, render pipeline, live avatar and services — refreshed every five seconds, with status in colour, word and symbol.

Why#

When something goes wrong, the operator should see at a glance where — before a customer calls. And the support team should keep an eye on all tenants at once.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationControl centre

  1. 1Open “Control centre” in the administration's bar (address /admin/leitstand; operator only).
  2. 2At the top four tiles: database, avatar engine, render pipeline, live avatar — each with status and the reason in words (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The four tiles: database, avatar engine, render pipeline and live avatar, each with status and reason.
    The four tiles: database, avatar engine, render pipeline and live avatar, each with status and reason.

    Fig. 1 The four tiles: database, avatar engine, render pipeline and live avatar, each with status and reason.

  3. 3“Tenants · overall view”: one tile per customer; a click opens that customer's view in their brand, with only their data.
  4. 4Render pipeline: gauges for finished renders, database latency, active jobs and new jobs in 24 hours; running jobs with “running since”; per course the status of pre-production (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The render pipeline with gauges and the jobs of the last 24 hours.
    The render pipeline with gauges and the jobs of the last 24 hours.

    Fig. 2 The render pipeline with gauges and the jobs of the last 24 hours.

  5. 5At the bottom “Services” and usage as a counter: “Total since day 1” and “This month · billing”, plus the usage per course.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Two views#

  • Provider's overall view — all tenants, every five seconds; intended for a round-the-clock support team.
  • Tenant view — after a click on a customer: only their data, in the customer's corporate design.

The states#

  • Database — critical if it does not respond; warning from 800 ms response time.
  • Render pipeline — critical if it cannot be read; warning as soon as a video has failed.
  • Avatar engine — warning while the machine is running but the renderer is not yet ready.
  • Services — OK if a service is set up; off if its access is missing.
  • Live avatar — currently set to off, with the note that this stage is not yet connected.

Who may do what#

Only the operator. The control centre reads, it switches nothing.

Tips#

  • The status is never shown by colour alone: every tile carries colour, word and symbol — OK ●, warning ▲, critical ■, off ○, unknown ?.
  • The signals come from real measurements, not from a default; an “unknown” means that a measurement did not respond.

Accounts, roles & permissions

liveOperator

Create real administration accounts and define in a matrix which university function may open which surface — with a visible difference between default and deliberate decision.

Why#

A student registry should see applications and records, but not the costs and operation of the installation. A president should read figures, not process records. Accounts and matrix make this configurable and traceable.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationPermissions

  1. 1Open “Accounts & roles”. Under “Create administration account”: choose name, email, “Function” (the description appears below) and organisation, then “Create account” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Create administration account”: name, email, function with description and organisation.
    “Create administration account”: name, email, function with description and organisation.

    Fig. 1 “Create administration account”: name, email, function with description and organisation.

  2. 2The password appears exactly once — write it down now. It is not stored anywhere and can no longer be retrieved after leaving the page. The account can sign in immediately.
  3. 3Under “Who has which role” change the function for every account; demo accounts are marked and cannot be changed here.
  4. 4Open “Permissions”: at the top the functions with their technical level, below that a table per group (university operations, operation of the installation, teaching, studies …): surfaces in rows, functions in columns (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 A group of permissions: surfaces in rows, functions in columns, deliberate deviations outlined in bold.
    A group of permissions: surfaces in rows, functions in columns, deliberate deviations outlined in bold.

    Fig. 2 A group of permissions: surfaces in rows, functions in columns, deliberate deviations outlined in bold.

  5. 5A click on a cell toggles the surface for this function; a second click withdraws the decision and lets the default apply again. Outlined in bold means: deliberately deviated from the default.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The university functions#

  • IT administration — operation of the installation: operations surfaces, costs, usage, guards and this matrix (technical level operator).
  • Study affairs — application, admission, student record, examinations office, transcript (level administration).
  • Administration (general) — day-to-day business of the university without the especially sensitive surfaces (level administration).
  • President — the view from above: figures, control, credentials; reading, not processing (level administration).
  • Lecturer — build a course, set an exam, assess (level learner, with teaching authorisation).
  • Student — the route from the study offering to the transcript (level learner).

IT administration can also change the matrix itself — it is a role of trust.

Which surfaces the matrix knows#

All pages of the administration (derived from the assignment of administration surfaces) plus surfaces outside it: proctoring & usage, lecturer surface, exam creation, learning workshop, fact-check file, student dashboard, studies, course player, survey, badges, doctorate and the HR cockpit. The longest matching path always applies.

Who may do what#

  • Create accounts, assign functions, toggle the matrix: only the operator.
  • Whoever may not open a surface lands on the dashboard with the notice “This area is locked for your function.” — “This is a setting in the permission matrix, not an error.”

Tips#

  • The university's organisation is at the front of the selection; empty organisations are marked “(empty)” and are at the back. Without an organisation every administration surface remains closed.
  • The matrix applies at one single point — the shell of all administration pages. It refines, it replaces nothing: whoever gets through here must still be allowed to access the page below.
  • Administration accounts are something different from the showcase's demo accounts: those can be adopted without signing in and therefore only see fictitious people.

Seats per customer

liveOperator

How many seats a customer has agreed and occupied, who is invited, what is free — and what that means in the current month. Deliberately without names.

Why#

The platform sells seats. The operator sees usage, not people — and sets the limit at which new enrolments are politely refused.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationSeats

  1. 1Open “Seats”. At the top four figures: seats agreed, of which occupied, billed in the current month, test seats (free of charge) — plus the base fee of the month (billed seats × rate per seat) (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 Seats agreed, of which occupied, billed and test seats — with the base fee of the month.
    Seats agreed, of which occupied, billed and test seats — with the base fee of the month.

    Fig. 1 Seats agreed, of which occupied, billed and test seats — with the base fee of the month.

  2. 2The table per customer: agreed (as an input field), occupied, free, invited, test and the situation in percent with a word (“room to spare”, “getting tight”, “full”, “nothing agreed”).
  3. 3Enter a new number under “Agreed” and “Set” — the message confirms it and warns if more are already occupied.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

How counting works#

  • One person, one seat — even with several courses. Whoever leaves frees the seat; the row remains as a record so that a past invoice remains traceable.
  • Partial seats count in full: whoever starts on the second and stops on the fifth is on the monthly invoice.
  • Without an agreement nobody gets in: if it says 0, every enrolment and invitation is refused — with a clear reason, not with an error.
  • Test accounts do not occupy a customer seat: the public tour creates real accounts; they go to the provider, not to the customer.

Who may do what#

Only the operator sets limits. The page shows no names — who occupies the seats is managed by the customer themselves (workforce, student administration).

Tips#

  • If the limit is set below the number of occupied seats, nobody is thrown out — only nobody new is added.
  • If no rate per seat is stored, the seats are counted but not priced; the page says so.
  • Usage (streaming, dialogue) is added separately — see “Usage”.

Sign-in via your own university (SSO)

in progressOperator

Assign email domains to a customer — new accounts then automatically land with the right tenant; with a stored sign-in system, members sign in via their university.

Why#

No additional password for students and staff — and no account that lands with no customer and whose usage therefore could not be billed.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationUniversity sign-in (SSO)

  1. 1Open “University sign-in (SSO)” in the administration's bar (address /admin/sso; operator only).
  2. 2Under “Assign domain”: enter “Email domain” (only the domain, without @), “Customer” and optionally the “SAML metadata URL” of the university's sign-in system — then “Assign” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Assign domain”: email domain, customer and the metadata address of the sign-in system.
    “Assign domain”: email domain, customer and the metadata address of the sign-in system.

    Fig. 1 “Assign domain”: email domain, customer and the metadata address of the sign-in system.

  3. 3The list “Assigned domains” shows per row domain, customer and “Sign-in”: “Via the university” or “Assignment only, sign-in by password” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “Assigned domains” with customer and type of sign-in.
    “Assigned domains” with customer and type of sign-in.

    Fig. 2 “Assigned domains” with customer and type of sign-in.

  4. 4“Remove” dissolves an assignment again.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Two steps, not one#

  • Assignment — the domain decides which customer a new account belongs to. Takes effect immediately.
  • Sign-in via the university — only with the metadata address of the sign-in system. Before that, members sign in with a password.

Who may do what — and why so strictly#

Only the operator may write here, also via the interface behind it. Whoever could enter someone else's domain would inherit another customer's users at the next sign-in.

Tips#

  • The metadata address may stay empty as long as the university's IT has not yet supplied it: the assignment works without it — only sign-in then still runs via password.
  • Subdomains do not inherit: mail.example.org needs an entry of its own.

Under review#

The flow and the assignment to the tenant are built; the test against a real identity federation of universities is still pending.

Data protection: deletion calendar, dry run and report

liveAdministrationOperator

Deletion requests, their records and the data held back because of retention obligations — with a deletion calendar, a dry run beforehand and a regular report to the data protection officer.

Why#

In front of a supervisory authority two figures count: what is due today — and what is still there although it was due. The second is the finding a supervisory authority finds first.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationDeletion

  1. 1Open the page “Data protection — deletions” under /admin/datenschutz. At the top the notice about overdue items, if there are any.
  2. 2Check the scope first: the link “Check the scope first” leads to “Deletion — dry run” (menu item “Deletion”). There enter the “Email of the data subject” and “Check scope” — nothing is deleted.
  3. 3The dry run shows per table the strategy (delete permanently, pseudonymise, follows along, check), the number of rows and a note — plus the external systems.
  4. 4Back on the data protection page: set up the “Report to the data protection officer” — “Interval in days” (1 to 365; 90 = quarterly), name and email of the data protection officer, then “Save” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Report to the data protection officer”: interval in days, name and email, the latest reports.
    “Report to the data protection officer”: interval in days, name and email, the latest reports.

    Fig. 1 “Report to the data protection officer”: interval in days, name and email, the latest reports.

  5. 5“Blocked, with deletion date” shows per data set category, action, due date and legal basis; “Deletion procedures” every request with date, status and an expandable deletion report (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “Blocked, with deletion date”: category, action, due date and legal basis.
    “Blocked, with deletion date”: category, action, due date and legal basis.

    Fig. 2 “Blocked, with deletion date”: category, action, due date and legal basis.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

  • The interval of the report is deliberately not in the source code: without a setting the run produces no reports, and the page says so.

Delete, block, anonymise#

  • Delete — where no obligation stands against it, data is deleted permanently.
  • Block — where a retention obligation applies, the data set is blocked and gets a deletion date (Art. 17(3)(b) GDPR).
  • Anonymise or pseudonymise — where connections must be preserved (such as statistics) without a person remaining identifiable.

Two surfaces, two steps#

The dry run shows what a deletion would touch without changing anything. The data protection page executes and writes the record. Whoever does not know this thinks one of the two is broken — that is why they refer to each other.

Who may do what#

  • Data protection page: an organisation's administration (HR management or university administration) for its organisation, and the operator.
  • Dry run: only the operator.

Tips#

  • Retention periods are calculated from the end of the year, as tax and commercial law require; the report is based on the result, not on the plan.
  • Every report can be expanded; “no action required” or the number of open items is already in the row.

Under review#

The dry run is based on a maintained but not provably complete list of tables; before a final deletion the page requires a complete check and legal approval.

Support

liveStudentsTeaching staffAdministrationOperator

Report questions and problems, answers in your own history; for the team a queue of all requests — and for the provider only the cases a customer explicitly releases.

Why#

Help must be easy to find and must not disappear in an inbox. And a provider that is to help may only see what it is shown.

How it works#

Click pathCampusServiceSupport

  1. 1Open “Help & support” (address /support): at the top “Frequently asked questions”, above them the route to the AI study adviser.
  2. 2“New request”: choose a category (technology, content, complaint / ombudsperson, other), enter subject and message, tick “confidential” if desired — “Send request” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “New request”: category, subject, message and “confidential”.
    “New request”: category, subject, message and “confidential”.

    Fig. 1 “New request”: category, subject, message and “confidential”.

  3. 3Under “My requests” read the history with the support's answers and reply.
  4. 4The team answers in the administration under “Support” (support desk): filter by status, expand a request, write “Support's answer …”, set the status and “Answer / update” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The support desk: requests with history, answer field and status.
    The support desk: requests with history, answer field and status.

    Fig. 2 The support desk: requests with history, answer field and status.

  5. 5If the provider's support needs insight into a student's record, it is granted under “Support access” (address /uds/support-zugang): “Who is it about?”, “For how long?”, “Why?” — “Grant access”. Revoking is possible at any time; access is then closed immediately.
  6. 6The provider opens released cases under “Released cases” (address /support-faelle) with “Open case”.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Lernplattform (always booked)

The status of a request#

  • Open
  • In progress
  • Answered
  • Closed

Support access: insight only on release#

The everyday case: “Student X cannot get into the exam.” For the provider's support to look in, the university has to allow it — for this one person, for a few days, with a reason, revocable at any time. The reason is in the log of both sides.

The provider sees only the released cases — no inventory, no search, no list of all students. In the case: studies, courses and attempts of this one person.

Who may do what#

  • Make requests: every signed-in account.
  • Answer the queue (support desk in the administration): the operator.
  • Grant and revoke support access: the customer's administration (and the operator), each only for people of their own institution. Accounts without an institution are seen and released only by the operator.
  • Open released cases: the provider's support, only as long as the release is running.

Tips#

  • A confidential request appears in the queue without a name (“confidential”).
  • The list of released cases does not yet show names; whoever opens a case is in the log — visible to the provider and to the customer.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

Your own trial student is created automatically — no sign-up.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/api/g-uds/rundgang?next=%2Fsupport

Tour switch

liveOperator

An entry page with two views of the same university: studies and administration — from there straight into the respective area.

Why#

Whoever wants to get to know the platform first chooses from whose point of view: a student's path or the administration's day-to-day business.

How it works#

Click pathAddress /erleben

  1. 1If the feature is on for a tenant, the switch is at the address /erleben.
  2. 2The page “One process, two perspectives” shows two cards: “Studies” (application, courses, exams, transcript) with “Open studies area” and “Administration” (applications, records, examinations office, transcripts) with “Open administration area” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “One process, two perspectives”: the cards Studies and Administration.
    “One process, two perspectives”: the cards Studies and Administration.

    Fig. 1 “One process, two perspectives”: the cards Studies and Administration.

  3. 3Below that the route “To the campus map” for the complete overview of all areas.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: Lernplattform (always booked)
  • Default: off, until a tenant switches it on. Part of the module “Learning platform”.

The two routes#

  • Studies — from the application via courses and exams to the transcript.
  • Administration — study affairs in day-to-day business: incoming applications, student records, examinations office, issuing transcripts.

Who may do what#

The switch itself is public as soon as it is switched on; only the operator can switch it on and off in the feature catalogue.

Tips#

  • “Open”, not “view”: whoever clicks here works in the platform — the switch is not a promotional tour.
  • A footnote says openly that payment processing is still being connected; all other processes run in production.

Change log and regulatory watch

liveOperatorAdministration

“What's new?” publicly — plus a log of which official sources are monitored, when they were last checked and which content was adjusted afterwards.

Why#

Transparency for customers and auditors: what is new, what has become better and what more secure — and the proof that training content is kept in line with the legal situation.

How it works#

Click pathAddress /changelog

  1. 1If the feature is on, “What's new?” is at the address /changelog: entries by type — New, Improved, Fix, Security (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 A day in the change log with entries by type: New, Improved, Fix, Security.
    A day in the change log with entries by type: New, Improved, Fix, Security.

    Fig. 1 A day in the change log with entries by type: New, Improved, Fix, Security.

  2. 2Under /changelog/regulatorik is the regulatory log: active sources, last scan, adjustments of the last 90 days, average time to adjustment — chronologically, with a link to the original source.
  3. 3Under “Regulatory watchdog” (address /admin/watchdog) the operator sees the configured sources with type, frequency, status, last check, last change and the affected slides (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The sources of the regulatory watchdog with type, frequency, status, last check and affected slides.
    The sources of the regulatory watchdog with type, frequency, status, last check and affected slides.

    Fig. 2 The sources of the regulatory watchdog with type, frequency, status, last check and affected slides.

  4. 4“Run watchdog now” triggers an extraordinary check; the message states how many sources were checked, how many have changed and which could not be reached.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: Lernplattform (always booked)
  • Default: off, until a tenant switches it on. Part of the module “Learning platform”.

What the watch shows in the administration#

  • Active sources (and how many are inactive)
  • Latest check runs with time
  • Sources without an initial check — newly created, never queried
  • Latest change findings with the number of sources checked
  • The list “Latest scan audits”: manual scan or nightly run, checked, unchanged, with change

Who may do what#

Anyone sees the two public pages as soon as the feature is on. Only the operator sees and starts sources and runs in the administration.

Tips#

  • The sources are generally checked quarterly, export control and sanctions monthly, some areas of law half-yearly; a nightly run only checks what is due.
  • Every run leaves an entry — visible in the administration and in the public regulatory log.

Quality and transparency page

liveOperatorAdministration

The public page on which the institution shows how it safeguards course content: seven checking layers, live figures of the last 30 days and a correction promise.

Why#

AI can be wrong. Trust does not arise from a claim but from disclosure: how checking is done, with which figures — and what happens if something was wrong after all.

How it works#

Click pathAddress /qualitaet

  1. 1If the feature is on, the page is at the address /qualitaet.
  2. 2“The 7 layers”: the route of a statement from the first question to the external check (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “The 7 layers”: the route of a statement from the first question to the external check.
    “The 7 layers”: the route of a statement from the first question to the external check.

    Fig. 1 “The 7 layers”: the route of a statement from the first question to the external check.

  3. 3“Live metrics (last 30 days)” with data date; they are aggregated daily (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The live metrics of the last 30 days with data date.
    The live metrics of the last 30 days with data date.

    Fig. 2 The live metrics of the last 30 days with data date.

  4. 4“Our promise”: whoever finds a factually wrong statement reports it — the correction comes within 24 hours, affected participants are notified.
  5. 5“Open audit log” leads to the public regulatory log.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: Lernplattform (always booked)
  • Default: off, until a tenant switches it on. Part of the module “Learning platform”.

How the page connects to the administration#

  • Report via the page → “Quality reports” in the administration (New, Under review, Resolved, Won’t fix).
  • Correction → “Errata” with a note and a reference to the fix.
  • Change in the legal situation → “Watchdog” (content quality) → adjusted content in the public log.

Who may do what#

The page is public as soon as it is switched on; the operator can switch it on and off in the feature catalogue.

Tips#

  • Reports via this page land in the administration under “Quality reports” — target: answer within 24 hours.
  • As long as there is no data yet, this is stated explicitly (“No data yet …”) instead of a zero.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/qualitaet

Interfaces to other learning systems

liveOperatorAdministration

Other learning systems launch courses of this platform, third-party content runs here; plus keys for the platform's own programming interface and webhooks that notify other systems.

Why#

Customers bring their inventory and keep their existing learning system. The more open the platform, the easier the switch — and the less anyone has to retype a thousand questions.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationThird-party content

  1. 1Open “Third-party content” in the administration's bar (address /admin/interop).
  2. 2Upload course packages (SCORM 1.2 and 2004 or Common Cartridge including question pools in QTI format). Under “Delivered packages” each is listed with format, number of files, size and remarks (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Delivered packages”: each with format, number of files, size and remarks.
    “Delivered packages”: each with format, number of files, size and remarks.

    Fig. 1 “Delivered packages”: each with format, number of files, size and remarks.

  3. 3“Connected learning systems”: register the platform as a tool in another learning system (LTI 1.3); the platform's own key addresses are listed with each connection.
  4. 4“Learning record store”: send learning events via xAPI to the university's learning record store; the list shows the last delivery or the last error.
  5. 5“API keys” (address /admin/api-schluessel): “Issue new key”, enter a purpose, tick rights, “Issue” — the key is shown exactly once.
  6. 6“Webhooks” (address /admin/webhooks): “Create new target” with purpose, address and events — the secret for checking the signature is shown exactly once.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Schnittstellen

What an API key may do#

Every key sees only the data of its institution. The list “Issued keys” shows the beginning, the rights, the creation date and the last use; “Block” makes a key unusable immediately (afterwards it says “blocked” with a date).

  • Read courses
  • Read and write people
  • Read and write course enrolments
  • Read learning progress
  • Read credentials

Which events a webhook reports#

  • Enrolment created — a person was enrolled in a course, via the interface or in the platform.
  • Course completed.
  • Credential issued — with the public verification code, never with the signed credential itself.
  • Person changed — a name was changed via the interface.

A guard in the code ensures that every event offered is actually triggered somewhere — no promise that a customer builds against and that never arrives.

Who may do what#

  • Third-party content (packages, learning systems, learning record store): administration and operator.
  • API keys and webhooks: a customer's administration for its own institution (HR management or university administration with an organisation) and the operator. A customer must be able to set up their connection themselves and switch it off themselves in an incident.

Tips#

  • What cannot be transferred is not bent but reported: matching questions, cloze texts with tolerances and items with partial points are not adopted by the question import.
  • Adopted question pools can be practised today — as an exam with proctoring and assessment they are not yet wired up (see outlook).
  • The complete guide for developers is available without signing in under /entwickler — a service provider can build the connection before receiving a key.
  • If a webhook target is not reached, delivery is retried for up to 26 hours at increasing intervals; every delivery is signed.

Under review#

The European exchange of achievement records has endpoints but no productive counterpart yet.

This handbook

liveStudentsTeaching staffAdministrationOperator

The handbook to all features — searchable, filterable by role, area and status, with click paths, QR codes for trying things out, deep links and a print view.

Why#

Whoever is looking for a feature should find it within seconds — and be able to try it out right away. The handbook grows with the platform: an automatic guard demands an entry for every feature and every administration page.

How it works#

Click pathHandbook

  1. 1Open “Handbook” (address /handbuch; also linked in the footer of every page if the feature is on).
  2. 2Ctrl+K or ⌘K opens the search: typing filters immediately, also by other words for the same thing; ↑ ↓ select, Enter opens, Esc closes (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The handbook's search with hits for “exam” — entries, areas and terms.
    The handbook's search with hits for “exam” — entries, areas and terms.

    Fig. 1 The handbook's search with hits for “exam” — entries, areas and terms.

  3. 3On the title page choose a role under “For whom?” or filter by role, area and status under “All features”; the selection is in the address and can be shared (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “For whom?”: the entry by role.
    “For whom?”: the entry by role.

    Fig. 2 “For whom?”: the entry by role.

  4. 4In an entry: “Contents” on the left, “On this page” on the right; every section has “Link to this section”, at the top “Copy link” and “Print / as PDF”.
  5. 5“How it all fits together” shows the overall structure as an organisation chart; “Glossary” and “What's new” are in the header and footer.
  6. 6“Try it yourself”: the QR code opens the place described — without an account of your own via trial access where this is possible.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Lernplattform (always booked)

How an entry is structured#

  • What it is, for whom, why
  • How it works — numbered steps with the real click path
  • Screenshot with markings (or placeholder)
  • Settings — including the switches of the feature catalogue and the module they belong to
  • Tips, related features, other words for the same thing
  • In-depth sections — for the detailed chapters

The status of an entry#

  • live — usable in the product
  • in progress — being built, parts are running
  • planned — decided or described, not yet usable
  • under review — cannot be reliably documented from code and documents; better marked as such than invented

Overviews (card lists, search, organisation chart) show no status; it is on the entry's page and in the print view.

How the handbook is maintained#

The content is data in the source code, the pages only display it. Guards check on every test run: every feature of the catalogue and every page of the administration has an entry, links and routes lead to real pages, no third-party names, no status badges in overviews. “What's new” is created from the development history. The content exists in German and English; the guard also checks that both versions stay in step.

Tips#

  • The in-depth details of “Technology & Security” are only visible to signed-in administration and operators — independent of the switch.
  • The print view can be limited to one area; it also contains the status of every entry.
  • If a screenshot is still missing, a designed placeholder describes what will be shown there.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/handbuch

Glossary and “What's new”

liveStudentsTeaching staffAdministrationOperator

The platform's terms explained in plain words, with other words for the same thing and a reference to the matching entry — plus the latest new features.

Why#

Tenant, sphere, speaker spot, head start: whoever understands the words understands the platform.

How it works#

Click pathHandbookGlossary

  1. 1In the handbook open “Glossary” (address /handbuch/glossar).
  2. 2Jump via the letter bar; every term names other words for it (“Also …”) and leads to the entry with “More on this” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 A term in the glossary with explanation, other words for it and “More on this”.
    A term in the glossary with explanation, other words for it and “More on this”.

    Fig. 1 A term in the glossary with explanation, other words for it and “More on this”.

  3. 3Under “What's new” (address /handbuch/neu) read the latest new features, each with a date and a reference to the entry.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

  • Part of the handbook; switched on and off with the switch “Handbook”.

Where “What's new” comes from#

The new features are created from the development history and assigned to an entry. So every news item leads to where the feature is described.

Glossary, handbook, knowledge#

  • Glossary — one word, one sentence.
  • Handbook — how a feature of this platform is operated.
  • Knowledge — background on learning platforms, courses and further education, independent of operation.

Tips#

  • The handbook's search also finds glossary terms; a term of the same name can appear before the entry.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/handbuch/glossar

Knowledge section “Knowledge”

liveOperatorAdministrationTeaching staffStudents

Public articles on learning platforms, course creation, further education, regulation and credentials — every question answered briefly first, then in depth, with sources and date, in German and English.

Why#

Whoever searches for “What is an LMS?” or “How do I document mandatory training?” should find a reliable answer — in search engines and in answer engines. The knowledge section explains the field; the handbook explains the operation.

How it works#

Click pathWebsiteKnowledgeTopicArticle

  1. 1Open “Knowledge” (address /wissen, in English /en/wissen; linked in the main menu and in the website footer).
  2. 2Choose a topic, e.g. “Learning platform and LMS”, “Creating courses”, “Onboarding” or “Credentials, certificates and microcredentials” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 A topic of the knowledge section with its articles.
    A topic of the knowledge section with its articles.

    Fig. 1 A topic of the knowledge section with its articles.

  3. 3An article begins with “In short” and “The key points at a glance”; below that “Contents”, the sections, where applicable “Step by step” and “Terms”, then “Frequently asked questions” (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “In short”: the answer is at the top of every article.
    “In short”: the answer is at the top of every article.

    Fig. 2 “In short”: the answer is at the top of every article.

  4. 4“How it works in Universe” leads to the matching page of the platform or to the handbook entry; “Related articles”, “Sources” and “Last reviewed” are at the end.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

  • The knowledge section is a surface of the provider, not a switch of the feature catalogue: it does not exist on a customer instance.
  • Content exists in German and English; in all other languages the English text appears in a translated shell, with a notice in the page language.

The thirteen topics#

  • Learning platform and LMS · Creating courses · Presentations · AI in learning
  • People development · Onboarding · Mandatory training · Academy
  • Coaching & tutoring · School · University and digital studies
  • Regulation and mandatory training · Credentials, certificates and microcredentials

As of 16.10.2026: 110 articles, each in German and English.

How the knowledge section is maintained#

  • An article is a data record in the source code: address (slug), topic, title, description, short answer, key points, sections (with list or table), three to six frequently asked questions, optionally steps and terms, related articles, matching platform pages, sources and the date of the last expert review.
  • New articles go into the file of their topic per language and are hooked into the language's register; the English version carries the same address.
  • Guards check on every test run: lengths of title and description, at least three questions, unique addresses, links and platform pages point to existing ones, sources via encrypted address, a valid date — no third-party names, no gendered spelling, all shell texts in all languages.
  • When revising, set the date “Last reviewed”: it is visible on the article and in the overview for search engines.

For search engines and answer engines#

Every page carries its own canonical address, language references only to existing versions and machine-readable markup (article, breadcrumbs, frequently asked questions, how-to, terms). All articles are additionally available as continuous text for answer engines, the pages in the overview for search engines.

Who may do what#

Read: anyone, without signing in. Change: via the source code — there is deliberately no editing surface, so that every article passes the guards before it appears.

Tips#

  • Handbook entries automatically show under “Background knowledge” the articles that refer to them — and vice versa.
  • Every figure about the platform must be provable from the code, legal matters need an official source; open standards may be named, third-party names may not.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/wissen

Maike, the concierge

liveStudentsTeaching staffAdministrationOperator

Maike answers spoken questions about Universe's features and offering from this handbook, flies to the matching section and shows it — or takes you on a short tour.

Why#

Whoever is looking for a feature simply asks: “Where can I find information about the editor?” Maike names the entry and the section, says “One moment, I'll open it for you” — and the page jumps there. Her knowledge is the handbook; what is not in it, she does not promise.

How it works#

Click pathHandbookMaike

  1. 1Maike floats in the handbook and on the website's home page as a round bubble; she can be dragged anywhere with mouse or finger.
  2. 2Tap Maike — she starts listening immediately. The very first time she asks in one sentence whether she may listen and offers the tour. Simply speak; after a short pause she sends the question herself.
  3. 3The ring around her picture pulses orange while she is listening and green while she is speaking. Her answer appears as a short subtitle next to her.
  4. 4The round button on the bubble is pause while she is speaking, afterwards play: continue, again or — right at the beginning — the tour.
  5. 5If a section fits, Maike flies next to it: the page scrolls there, the rest of the page recedes briefly, a fine line of light runs around the section, and the matching sentences are highlighted briefly. Esc cancels everything.
  6. 6The tour (compass button or say “Tour”) leads across the page in a few stations; play/pause controls it.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: onModule: Lernplattform (always booked)
  • Off: no bubble in the handbook and on the home page, Maike does not answer.
  • The voice is Maike's own; if it is not available, Maike answers only as text — never with someone else's voice.

Where Maike gets her knowledge#

For every question Maike searches for the most fitting entries of this handbook — via title, short text, steps, in-depth sections and other words for the same thing — and answers only from them. She takes prices and packages from the website's public offering. She answers in the language of the page; on pages whose language the handbook does not yet cover, her source is the English version.

Protected in-depth details from “Technology & Security” are never a source for Maike. If a feature is planned or in progress according to the handbook, she says so.

“One moment, I'll open it for you”#

Maike can only open sections that the search has really found — inventing a section is impossible. For this the page switches to the entry if necessary and jumps to the section.

Microphone, consent and limits — who may do what#

  • The microphone only opens after your one-time consent and only while Maike is listening; speech recognition runs in the EU.
  • Anyone may ask Maike, without signing in; daily limits apply per connection.
  • Maike is a synthetic AI figure and is labelled as such.

Tips#

  • The browser remembers the position of the bubble; after an answer Maike stays next to the section until you drag her or ask again.
  • Without a microphone: with the keyboard you reach “Type instead of speaking” — Enter listens, the space bar is play/pause, Esc ends.
  • With reduced motion (system setting) Maike does not fly but jumps; the page jumps without dimming and line of light, the sentences stay highlighted.
  • Maike does not answer questions about a particular university or a degree programme — she is the platform's concierge.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/handbuch

Administration: overview, bar and tools

liveOperatorAdministration

The home page of the admin back end with tiles, the bar of all administration pages and the tools overview with running counts of open items.

Why#

One look should be enough to see where something is open — and one click to get there. At the same time the back end separates strictly: a university's administration sees its day-to-day business, only the operator sees operation, costs and usage.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationOverview

  1. 1Open “Administration” (address /admin). Below the main navigation is the bar “Platform admin” with all administration pages; it can be scrolled sideways.
  2. 2The home page shows tiles: tenants, cost dashboard, watchdog, audit evidence bundles, tools, feature catalogue, abuse monitoring, quality reports and diagnostics — each only if the page exists on this installation. Every tile describes the page it opens: “Tools” the overview with counters, “Feature catalogue” the switches per tenant, “Diagnostics” the speech recognition check, unlocking and the live status (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The administration's tiles, each with one sentence about the page it opens.
    The administration's tiles, each with one sentence about the page it opens.

    Fig. 1 The administration's tiles, each with one sentence about the page it opens.

  3. 3At the top right two emergency buttons: “Check peer voices” (checks the assigned voice for every fellow-learner name) and “Reset audio budget” (in case the sound cuts out during a demonstration).
  4. 4Open “Tools”: cards in three groups — compliance & quality (proctoring, quality reports, content quality), users & reach (costs) and transparency (the public quality figures) — with the number of open items; highlighted in yellow what needs attention.
  5. 5At the bottom of the home page: “What does NOT happen here?” — a company's employees, invitations and training rate run via the HR cockpit.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

  • Menu items of switched-off features disappear from the bar (e.g. students, matching, document audit, controlling, statistics, support, finances, workshop credits).
  • Tiles and tool cards only appear for pages that exist on this installation — on a customer instance the provider's surfaces are missing.

The administration's bar#

  • Day-to-day university business: applications, students, transcript, matching, document audit, statistics, support
  • Rights and accounts: permissions, accounts & roles, IT administration, test students
  • Business: controlling, enquiries, course packages, seats, modules & prices, booked modules, usage, finances, costs
  • Quality and evidence: watchdog, quality reports, audit evidence, deletion, audit log, errata, proctoring
  • Tools: tools, feature flags, abuse, access codes, pronunciation, learning workshop, workshop credits
  • Assignment of administration surfaces
  • At the end, depending on the role: control centre, university sign-in (SSO), data protection, third-party content, API keys, webhooks, regulatory watchdog, launch health, voucher health, my courses

Two levels — the shell and the page#

The shell of all administration pages lets administration and operator in and then asks the permission matrix whether the account's university function may open this surface. Every page then checks its permission itself: operations pages (costs, control centre, controlling, tools …) require the operator, day-to-day pages (applications, students, transcript, badges, surveys, doctorate, fact check) admit the administration.

Whoever is not allowed something lands on the dashboard with a notice — not on an error page.

Who may do what#

  • Home page and tools: only the operator.
  • Administration and operator see the bar; which page opens is decided by the page. The ten items at the end only appear if the role may open the page.
  • “Reset audio budget” only resets your own budget.

Tips#

  • Control centre, university sign-in (SSO), data protection, third-party content, API keys, webhooks, regulatory watchdog, launch health, voucher health and “My courses” are at the end of the bar — each only for roles that may also open the page.
  • The menu item “Watchdog” leads to content quality; source monitoring itself is under /admin/watchdog.
  • “Learning workshop” in the bar leads into the course workshop.

Assignment of administration surfaces

liveOperator

Who owns which administration page — the customer or the provider? With a reason, with the gap and with entries without a page.

Why#

A customer instance must not show a page that has not been decided on. This list is the checklist for that — and it really reads the folder instead of confirming itself.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationAssignment

  1. 1Open “Assignment”. At the top “Who owns which surface?” and “This deployment: …” — whether this installation is the provider's or a customer instance.
  2. 2Two counters: “The customer” (stays in a customer instance) and “Universe” (operation across all customers; locked in a customer instance) (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The two counters: the customer's surfaces and the surfaces of operation across all customers.
    The two counters: the customer's surfaces and the surfaces of operation across all customers.

    Fig. 1 The two counters: the customer's surfaces and the surfaces of operation across all customers.

  3. 3“Not assigned”: pages that are in the folder but in no list. They remain visible — a forgotten entry must not take anything away from the customer; nevertheless nothing has been decided about them.
  4. 4“Entered, but no longer present”: entries without a page.
  5. 5Below that, per group, every page with address (clickable) and reason.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The two groups#

  • The customer — university or company operations; stays in a customer instance.
  • Universe — operation of the software across all customers; locked in a customer instance. This also includes “Finances” (tuition fees and lecturer fees): the page reads across all tenants and therefore does not belong in customer hands.

Who may do what#

Only the operator. The page reads and shows; the assignment is changed in the source code.

Tips#

  • The list does not (yet) move any page; it is the checklist for a later move.
  • The permission matrix derives its administration surfaces from the same list — it exists only once.

IT administration & access rights

liveOperator

All accounts with the three access rights that can really be set: role, teaching authorisation and organisation — plus the applicable rules on which role sees which surfaces.

Why#

If someone cannot get in or sees too much, it is almost always down to role, teaching authorisation or organisation — all three are here in one place.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationIT administration

  1. 1Open “IT administration”.
  2. 2Find an account in the field “Search by name or email…”.
  3. 3In the row choose the role (students, org admin (HR), owner (full access)), tick “Lecturer” for teaching authorisation and choose the organisation (“— none —” possible).
  4. 4“Save” — the row reports “saved” or “error”.
  5. 5At the bottom “Roles & visibility”: which role sees which surfaces; features are enabled under “Features” (Control) (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Roles & visibility”: which role sees which surfaces.
    “Roles & visibility”: which role sees which surfaces.

    Fig. 1 “Roles & visibility”: which role sees which surfaces.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Roles & visibility#

  • Owner — full administration area: costs, watchdog, audit, administration, IT administration, features — as well as all teaching and learning surfaces.
  • Org admin (HR) — HR cockpit: manage employees, assign courses, view progress. No administration area.
  • Teaching authorisation (addition to the role) — teaching: course production, classes and assessment.
  • Students — own dashboard: take courses, learn, view transcripts.

Who may do what#

Only the operator. The list is loaded with elevated rights because profiles would otherwise not be readable due to the database's row-level protection — that is why the page is behind the strictest guard.

Tips#

  • Teaching authorisation is an addition to the role: it opens course production, classes and assessment — regardless of which role the account otherwise has.
  • A role that cannot be chosen here (such as that of the university administration) appears as “(legacy)” and is preserved. Administration accounts with a university function are created under “Accounts & roles”.

Test students and your own test courses

liveOperator

Create throwaway students with a real sign-in, move through the platform as them and delete them again — and enrol yourself in any course for testing.

Why#

Testing happens on the real installation, with real recording of usage. That requires accounts that are marked as test accounts and disappear again without a trace.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationTest students

  1. 1Open “Test students”. Under “Create”: name (optional — otherwise random), number (1 to 25) and “Enrol in course (€0)”, then “Create student” or “Create … students” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 Test students: on the left “Create” with name, number and course, on the right the list with “Sign in as”.
    Test students: on the left “Create” with name, number and course, on the right the list with “Sign in as”.

    Fig. 1 Test students: on the left “Create” with name, number and course, on the right the list with “Sign in as”.

  2. 2The password for manual sign-in appears with a copy button.
  3. 3In the list, per student, “Sign in as” — a new tab signs in this student there. Back to the operator: sign out in the test tab or keep using your own tab.
  4. 4Clean up: individually via the bin or “Delete all”.
  5. 5“My courses (test access)” (address /admin/my-courses): enter one course or, with “All courses into my list”, every course into your own account — without payment, without a voucher; existing ones are skipped.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

What the list shows#

  • Name, email and — if available — matriculation number
  • the number of enrolled courses
  • “Sign in as” (new tab) and delete

Who may do what#

Only the operator — both pages.

Tips#

  • Every account created this way is marked as a test account and does not occupy a customer seat.
  • The whole route can be played through: course, exam, transcript — with real recording of usage.

Abuse and network addresses

liveOperator

Who costs the most today? Usage per network address against the daily limits, set and lift blocks — only checksums are stored, never real network addresses.

Why#

A program that drives up AI costs should be noticed quickly — and a person blocked wrongly should be able to get back in quickly.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationAbuse

  1. 1Open “Abuse” (abuse dashboard). It shows today by universal time.
  2. 2At the top: active network addresses today (of which blocked), sessions today, AI tokens today, daily costs today and the exchange rate used (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 Active network addresses, sessions, AI tokens and daily costs of today.
    Active network addresses, sessions, AI tokens and daily costs of today.

    Fig. 1 Active network addresses, sessions, AI tokens and daily costs of today.

  3. 3“Active daily limits per IP”: sessions, AI tokens, audio characters, minutes of speech recognition, avatar minutes and costs — with the smaller share that applies to demo sessions.
  4. 4“Top IPs by daily costs”: per row shortened checksum, sessions, tokens, audio characters, minutes, costs and status (active or blocked, with reason) (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 “Top IPs by daily costs” with shortened checksum, usage, status and “Block immediately”.
    “Top IPs by daily costs” with shortened checksum, usage, status and “Block immediately”.

    Fig. 2 “Top IPs by daily costs” with shortened checksum, usage, status and “Block immediately”.

  5. 5“Block immediately” blocks an address for the day, “Lift block” resets the daily block.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

What is limited#

  • Sessions per day
  • AI tokens
  • Characters of speech output
  • Minutes of speech recognition
  • Avatar minutes
  • Costs in dollars

Demo sessions only get a share of these limits; the share is shown on the page.

Who may do what#

Only the operator blocks and unblocks; every action takes effect immediately and the page loads the new state.

Tips#

  • The daily limits are in the installation's configuration; the page shows them so that nobody has to search configuration files.
  • If nothing has happened yet today, this is stated explicitly — the list fills up as soon as sessions run.

Access codes and voucher health

liveOperator

Codes with which someone enrols in a course without payment — with a maximum number of redemptions and a sending link; plus a list of stuck enrolments that can be redeemed afterwards at the push of a button.

Why#

For pilot groups, partners and events: a code instead of an invoice — and no enrolment that silently gets stuck.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationAccess codes

  1. 1Open “Access codes”. Under “Create new unlock code”: choose a course, enter a code or “Random”, “Max. redemptions” (empty = unlimited, 1 = one-time code) and an internal label, then “Create code” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Create new unlock code”: course, code or random, maximum number of redemptions and label.
    “Create new unlock code”: course, code or random, maximum number of redemptions and label.

    Fig. 1 “Create new unlock code”: course, code or random, maximum number of redemptions and label.

  2. 2The list “Codes” shows code (with label), course, “Redeemed” (x / maximum), status (active or deactivated) and the sending link; “Deactivate” or “Activate” per row (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The codes with course, redemptions, status and sending link.
    The codes with course, redemptions, status and sending link.

    Fig. 2 The codes with course, redemptions, status and sending link.

  3. 3Redemption happens under /coupon/einloesen or via the sending link /start/<course>?code=<CODE>, which prefills the code.
  4. 4“Voucher health” (link at the top of the page): users who registered with a code but whose enrolment is missing — with email, code, course and time.
  5. 5“Redeem all now” catches up on the enrolments; the message states checked, redeemed and genuinely blocked.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The fields of a code#

  • Course — for which course (and which level) the code applies
  • Code — freely selectable or random; stored in capital letters
  • Max. redemptions — empty = unlimited
  • Label (internal) — what the code is for, e.g. a pilot group

Who may do what#

Create and deactivate codes and catch up on enrolments: only the operator. Redeem: anyone with a code.

Tips#

  • Usually a stuck enrolment heals itself on the next visit to the dashboard or in the daily run; “genuinely blocked” means: used up or invalid code.
  • The link “Launch health” at the top leads to launch readiness with a test email.

Enquiries from the website

liveOperator

What comes in via the website's contact form — universities, academies, companies — in one place, with contact, interest and message.

Why#

An enquiry that is stored but not displayed anywhere is lost — only more slowly than one that was never stored.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationEnquiries

  1. 1Open “Enquiries”. At the top: total number and how many are open.
  2. 2Per enquiry: organisation, type (university, academy, company, other, try it yourself, callback), status (“open”, “answered” or “discarded”), name, email (clickable; for a callback only the number), phone, “interest” in modules, message and time.
  3. 3Answer by email from within the enquiry.
  4. 4Afterwards “Mark as answered” or “Discard”; the “open” count at the top drops immediately. “Reopen” resets an enquiry.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Who may do what#

Only the operator. The page is a surface of the provider across all customers.

Tips#

  • The form is publicly available under /plattform/kontakt.
  • Module requests from existing customers do not arrive here but in module management under “Customer requests”.

Audit log and audit evidence bundle

liveAdministrationOperator

Who did what when in an organisation's administration — and a package with all records for an auditor, as one file with a checksum per file.

Why#

In an audit by an auditor, a supervisory authority or a customer, what counts is what is documented. Every change in the administration is logged; the package bundles the records with which, for example, the training obligation of the European AI Act can be proven.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationAudit log

  1. 1Open “Audit log”: “All admin actions in <organisation>, newest first”.
  2. 2“Activity (top 5)” shows the most frequent actions; a click filters by them. A click on a person filters by them; “Reset filter” removes this.
  3. 3Every entry: action (e.g. “Invitation sent”, “Role changed”), up to three details, person and time (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 A person's audit log entries: action, details, person and time.
    A person's audit log entries: action, details, person and time.

    Fig. 1 A person's audit log entries: action, details, person and time.

  4. 4Open “Audit evidence”: the page shows what the package contains — with current figures (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 What the audit evidence package contains — with current figures.
    What the audit evidence package contains — with current figures.

    Fig. 2 What the audit evidence package contains — with current figures.

  5. 5“Download ZIP” — the package is built live from the current data; generating it is noted in the audit log.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

What the package contains#

  • 01 — data processing agreement, issued to the organisation, with technical and organisational measures and a list of sub-processors (PDF).
  • 02 — status of all accounts of the organisation: certificate, result, validity, verification address (CSV).
  • 03 — per employee the current certificate with QR code (PDF).
  • 04 — the administration actions of the last 60 days (CSV).
  • 05 — the content adjustments of the last year justified by regulation (CSV).
  • 06 — description of the regulatory watch procedure with a reference to the public log.
  • 07 — machine-readable index with a checksum per file, for verifying the authenticity of the whole package.

Which actions are logged#

  • Dashboard opened
  • Employee list opened
  • Invitation sent, resent, cancelled
  • Employee removed or updated
  • Report exported
  • Role changed

Who may do what#

Both pages are opened by an organisation's administration (HR management or university administration with an organisation) and the operator — each only for their own organisation, never platform-wide.

Tips#

  • The entries are immutable and kept for 365 days.
  • The page shows the last 300 entries; for older ones the filter by person or action helps.

Pronunciation of the avatar voice

liveOperator

Correct terms the voice mispronounces without a program change — word-exact, case-sensitive, each entry can be switched on and off.

Why#

Technical terms and abbreviations often sound wrong. A correction here takes effect in all courses.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationPronunciation

  1. 1Open “Pronunciation”.
  2. 2Enter “Term (as in the text)” (e.g. IT), “Pronunciation (as it sounds)” (e.g. Eye-Tee) and optionally a note — then “Add” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 Create a term with pronunciation and note.
    Create a term with pronunciation and note.

    Fig. 1 Create a term with pronunciation and note.

  3. 3In the table toggle each entry “active”/“off” or delete it via the bin.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The fields#

  • Term — up to 60 characters
  • Pronunciation — up to 120 characters
  • Note — optional, up to 200 characters
  • Active — can be switched on and off without deleting the entry

Who may do what#

Only the operator; the list applies to the whole installation.

Tips#

  • Matches are word-exact: IT also applies in IT security, never within a word in which the letters merely occur.
  • Voice already generated stays as it was: the correction applies the next time a slide is played or after the next pre-production. Finished videos are never re-created by themselves.
  • Built-in terms (such as common standards and supervisory abbreviations) continue to apply even if the list is empty.

Content quality, quality reports and errata

liveOperator

Deviations between course content and the current legal situation with deadlines by severity, users' error reports on slides and the error triage from preview and player.

Why#

An error in the course should be fixed quickly and traceably — with a deadline, with a reason and with a visible correction.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationWatchdog

  1. 1“Watchdog” in the bar opens “Content quality — regulatory watchdog”: at the top monitored facts, open alerts, critical, deadline exceeded and last scan; “Start scan” checks immediately (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 Monitored facts, open and critical alerts, exceeded deadlines and the last scan.
    Monitored facts, open and critical alerts, exceeded deadlines and the last scan.

    Fig. 1 Monitored facts, open and critical alerts, exceeded deadlines and the last scan.

  2. 2Under “Content alerts” every detected deviation with severity, age against deadline, old and new value; buttons “Approve”, “Postpone”, “Reject” — after approval “Deploy → audit log”, which makes the adjustment visible in the public log.
  3. 3“Quality reports”: reports from users (target: answer within 24 hours). Filter “Open” or “All”; per report description, slide, disputed fact and the fact that is correct according to the report; buttons “Under review”, “Mark resolved” (with optional note) and “Won’t fix” (with reason).
  4. 4“Errata” (error triage): reported errors from preview and course player, filterable by status, course and category; edit status, triage note and reference to the fix directly per entry and “Save”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The states#

  • Content alerts — open, approved, rejected, postponed, deployed
  • Quality reports — new, under review, resolved, won’t fix
  • Errata — open, in progress, fixed, will not be fixed, duplicate

Categories of errata#

  • Content
  • Language
  • Image does not match what is spoken
  • Audio
  • Design
  • Sources
  • Other

Who may do what#

All three pages: only the operator. Learners report via the quality page and in the player; lecturers see the checks of their own content in the fact-check file.

Tips#

  • Deadlines by severity: critical 48 hours, important 7 days, informational 30 days. Deployed, rejected and postponed alerts no longer count against the deadline.
  • The “Scan history” shows every run with type, checked, unremarkable and flagged facts.

Handing over course packages

liveOperator

Export a finished course as a file from one installation and import it into another — with a checksum, customer assignment and approval before it becomes visible.

Why#

Handing over a course built on commission should be an object you can send, store and verify — not a manual operation in a database. After the handover the course belongs to the customer.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationCourse packages

  1. 1Open “Course packages”.
  2. 2“Export”: choose a course (file course or published workshop course), optionally “Title in the package”, then “Download package” (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 “Export” and “Import”: choose a course and download the package, choose a customer and import the package.
    “Export” and “Import”: choose a course and download the package, choose a customer and import the package.

    Fig. 1 “Export” and “Import”: choose a course and download the package, choose a customer and import the package.

  3. 3“Import”: choose “For which customer?” (or “— do not assign yet —”) and choose the package file. The checksum is verified; if it does not match, nothing is created.
  4. 4The message names modules, slides and media — and that the course is “not yet visible”.
  5. 5Under “Arrived here”: check, if necessary “Assign customer …”, then “Approve”. With “Withdraw” a course is no longer delivered; the row remains as a record.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The states of an imported package#

  • imported · not yet visible
  • approved · playable
  • withdrawn — no longer delivered, remains as a record

A course with the wrong customer cannot be taken back, only explained — so check first, then approve.

What is listed per package#

  • Title, origin (installation and course key), time of import
  • Modules, slides, media
  • who owns it and the identifier under which it runs
  • the checksum

Who may do what#

Only the operator. A workshop author can additionally adopt a course package in the workshop as a new draft (see “Creating a course from material”).

Tips#

  • Media (graphics, voice recordings, pre-produced videos) are not in the package — it would be gigabytes in size. Their list is in it, with a checksum as far as the file is here; the others must be transferred separately.
  • Importing a package twice creates nothing twice; the message says “already there”.
  • Reading uses the same route as the course player — what is exported is exactly what students see.

Launch health and diagnostics

liveOperator

A checklist of whether the installation is ready to launch — red blockers, yellow warnings, a real test of email delivery — and the diagnostics page with tools and live status.

Why#

Before a launch (new customer, new instance, pilot) nothing should fail because of a missing setting — and in operation, locked sessions and a failed service should be quick to find.

How it works#

Click pathAdministrationDiagnostics

  1. 1Open “Launch health” under /admin/launch-health (also linked on the page “Access codes”). At the top: “No open blockers — ready to launch” or the number of open blockers.
  2. 2The table: per checkpoint status (green, red = blocker, orange = warning), name and detail (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The checkpoints with status (green, warning, blocker), name and detail.
    The checkpoints with status (green, warning, blocker), name and detail.

    Fig. 1 The checkpoints with status (green, warning, blocker), name and detail.

  3. 3“Test email delivery live”: enter a recipient and “Send test email” — confirms the whole sending route, not just the key.
  4. 4“Diagnostics” (tile on the home page; address /diagnostics, the old address in the administration redirects there): tabs “Tools” and “Uptime”.
  5. 5“Tools”: “Check speech recognition” queries the active EU service and reports whether the key is set and accepted — the page never shows the key itself. The fallback service outside the EU only appears if it has been explicitly switched on, and then with a warning. Next to it “Unlock all locked sessions” — unlocks sessions that have reached their usage limit and resets their counters.
  6. 6“Uptime”: “Live system health” with “Check now” — overall status, version, environment, response time and the dependencies; plus two addresses for external monitoring.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The checkpoints#

  • Database reachable (blocker)
  • Table of access codes present (blocker)
  • Redemption function present — checked with a non-existent code that uses up nothing (blocker)
  • Access codes with remaining redemptions available, counted across all courses and broken down per course (warning — without codes enrolment runs via other routes)
  • Stuck enrolments (warning)
  • Email sending set up (blocker)
  • Secret for background runs set (warning)

Who may do what#

  • Launch health: only the operator.
  • Diagnostics, speech recognition check and unlocking: only the operator — both affect the whole installation.

Tips#

  • A red blocker prevents the launch, an orange warning does not.
  • For external monitoring: have the light address (“liveness”, answers without a database) pinged every 1 to 5 minutes, the thorough one (“readiness”) less often.

Chapter 10

Apps

The platform runs in the browser on phone, tablet and computer. Dedicated apps for the app stores are the next big step.

Mobile in the browser

liveStudentsTeaching staffAdministrationOperator

The whole platform on phone and tablet — without installation: slide from edge to edge, a bar for the essentials, a control ring for everything else, in portrait and in landscape.

Why#

People learn on the go. On a small screen the slide has priority; the speaker becomes small, the controls move into one button, and nothing covers the content.

How it works#

Click pathCourseControl ring

  1. 1Open the institution's address in the phone's browser, sign in or use trial access.
  2. 2In the course the slide runs from edge to edge; the speaker appears as a small bubble (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The course on the device: slide from edge to edge, the speaker as a small bubble, at the bottom the transport bar.
    The course on the device: slide from edge to edge, the speaker as a small bubble, at the bottom the transport bar.

    Fig. 1 The course on the device: slide from edge to edge, the speaker as a small bubble, at the bottom the transport bar.

  3. 3At the bottom the transport bar with five controls: previous slide · 10 seconds back · play/pause · 10 seconds forward · next slide.
  4. 4Everything else is opened by the round button at the bottom right — the control ring: one tap fans out the functions, each with icon and word; a tap next to it, Esc or the X closes it.
  5. 5Turned to landscape, the bar becomes a small pill that can be dragged anywhere by its handle; the slide fills the height.
  6. 6Enlarge and move the slide with two fingers; the back button restores the starting position.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

When the platform is “mobile”#

  • narrow — up to 767 pixels wide,
  • or low — up to 520 pixels high (a phone in landscape),
  • or a tablet in portrait up to 1100 pixels wide.

Everything else counts as desktop: then with header, footer bar and large speaker. An automatic guard checks these rules and the position of the controls.

What changes on the phone#

  • The desktop header and footer bar disappear; a narrow header only appears in portrait.
  • The speaker bubble is small (96 pixels) and carries no control block.
  • The column is borderless; in landscape the slide fits the height instead of a narrow column.

The mobile preview#

Under /g-uds-demo/mobil a course is shown in a frame with the dimensions of a phone (390 × 844) or tablet (768 × 1024) and scaled down to the screen. Rotating swaps width and height. A workshop course starts there as a preview in the student view — without author tools, nothing is published.

Tips#

  • In the campus the mobile preview shows every course in a phone or tablet frame, portrait and landscape — the player lays itself out there exactly as on the device.
  • The browser remembers the position of the pill per course; it always stays in view.
  • Subtitles can be switched on at the speaker bubble; bubble and subtitles never land on the bar.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo/mobil

Add to home screen

liveStudents

The campus can be placed on the home screen like an app and opens directly in the learning arena without browser bars.

Why#

One tap instead of typing an address — and a surface that feels like an app.

How it works#

Click pathCampusBrowser menuAdd to home screen

  1. 1Open the campus in the phone's browser (address /g-uds-demo).
  2. 2In the browser's menu choose “Add to home screen” (depending on the browser “Install” or “Add app”) (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The notice “To your phone” in the learning arena with the install button.
    The notice “To your phone” in the learning arena with the install button.

    Fig. 1 The notice “To your phone” in the learning arena with the install button.

  3. 3The new icon opens the learning arena without browser bars, in portrait (Fig. 2).
    Fig. 2 The weekly leaderboard in the learning arena.
    The weekly leaderboard in the learning arena.

    Fig. 2 The weekly leaderboard in the learning arena.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

How it works#

A manifest describes name, icon, start page (the learning arena), colours and orientation; a small background service makes the campus installable. It is only registered for the campus area and passes every request on to the network unchanged — it deliberately buffers nothing.

Web app or app from the store?#

The web app is available today and needs no installation from a store. It does not offer notifications, storage on the device or working offline — that is a matter for the planned apps.

Tips#

  • The web app caches nothing: it loads every page fresh from the network and can therefore never show outdated content. It does not work without a connection.
  • It only applies to the campus; the rest of the website remains an ordinary website.
  • On the home screen it is called “Learning arena”; the full name carries the operator of the installation. The avatar figure serves as the icon.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/g-uds-demo

Student app

under reviewStudents

A standalone app for students — its own project, its own database — that is to use the same competence engine as this platform in future, as a versioned copy.

Why#

A lean app for everyday study life: learn with your own documents, practise for exams — and later have your competence checked by the same rules as in the platform's course.

How it works#

  1. 1The app is developed and operated as a separate project; at run time it is not tied to this platform.
  2. 2It adopts parts of this platform as a versioned copy with an adoption log; the platform records errors and changes in copied parts in a reconciliation book of its own.
  3. 3Planned order of integration: A — papers and interfaces (done) · B — adopt the core of the competence diagnosis as soon as it has been accepted here · C — after competence continuity · D — competence passport and verification page.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

What the review report says about the app#

  • One account per person, sign-in by code to the email address; a university address can be confirmed. Up to three devices can be paired.
  • Documents are broken down on the device into text per page or slide; only the text is stored, not the file.
  • Learning there means: quiz, cards, exam questions and exercises from your own material — there is (as yet) no assessment of open answers.
  • A “mastery” is calculated from learning events on the device; it is a learning aid, not a credential, and remains separate from the competence diagnosis.
  • There are no lecturers and no tenants.

What is to be added with the competence engine#

  • Exam check — learning objectives from your own documents with a reference down to the page; what has been checked, where the gaps are, what helps next. Never automatically becomes a credential.
  • Competence check — new practice cases that are not in the script; every result shows whether it is based only on your own documents or on verified competence requirements.
  • Documents remain private, deletable and exportable; they do not go into a marketplace or into training.

Dependencies#

  • Acceptance of the competence diagnosis on this platform (database changes, acceptance with real models).
  • Technical prerequisites for the byte-identical copy of the core in the app (test library, test run, origin note).
  • For the passport: competence continuity and a decision on signature and format.

Under review#

The app is a separate project outside this repository; its scope and its release are only documented here from a review report (as of 16.10.2026), not from the code. Open decisions of the owner concern, among other things, credit for the competence check, who creates verified competence catalogues, the handling of unclear assessments without lecturers, retention periods and the location of the passport.

Apps for the app stores

plannedStudentsTeaching staffAdministrationOperator

The whole system as an app for phones and tablets of both major mobile platforms.

Why#

Notifications, storage on the device, an icon on the home screen — and for many institutions the expected form in which a learning platform is handed out to students and employees.

How it works#

  1. 1In the owner's order it comes after the new editor, the competence diagnosis and competence continuity.
  2. 2What is meant is the whole system, not just the course player.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Purpose#

Today the platform runs entirely in the phone's browser (see “Mobile in the browser”). An app from the store adds what the browser cannot do or can only do to a limited extent, and meets the expectation of many institutions.

Planned scope#

  • the same roles and surfaces as in the browser: learning, teaching, exams, studies, administration — according to the tenant's switches
  • the mobile player with transport bar and control ring as the starting point
  • what the browser cannot do or can only do to a limited extent, such as notifications and storage on the device

The scope is described, not promised; there is no date.

Dependencies#

  • the preceding steps of the order (editor, competence diagnosis, continuity)
  • tenants, brand and feature switches must also apply in the app
  • the rules for data in the EU apply unchanged

The stage as an app of its own

plannedTeaching staff

The slide editor as a standalone app for phone, tablet, web and computer — the same core, split off as a versioned copy.

Why#

Build and give presentations, even without a learning platform — with everything the stage can do, on every device.

How it works#

  1. 1The core has already been built as a self-contained module: slide model, elements, history, templates, suggestions, timing to the voice — without ties to courses, roles or database.
  2. 2The split-off follows as a versioned copy with an adoption log; there is no automatic synchronisation.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

What is already in place#

  • A core without imports from outside its folder — no interface framework, no database, no course or role model; a guard checks this.
  • It runs unchanged in any JavaScript environment: web, phone, tablet, computer — without dependence on screen, clock or randomness.
  • Every edit is a command in a plain, storable format; the history stores state and command.
  • The interface depends only on the core and on an adapter (rendering, upload, AI, beam, figures, storage, back to template) and can come along.

Planned scope#

The standalone version is to be able to do everything the stage can do — on all major platforms for phone, tablet, web and computer —, and to process every movement in the core as a command: mouse, finger, gesture in front of the camera, phone, voice, second device.

How the adoption works#

  • copy the core's folder and record the version together with the source state
  • create an adoption log: source and target version, adjustments, deviations of the interface, test results, changes not yet adopted
  • copy the tests along and run them there
  • write a converter of its own for its own templates — or none

Chapter 11

Technology & Security

Public: a general overview of operation in the EU, data protection and the handling of AI. The in-depth details — architecture, data flows, individual protective measures — are visible only to signed-in administration and operators.

How the platform is built

liveStudentsTeaching staffAdministrationOperator

A web application that runs in the browser, with a relational database in Frankfurt and data centres in the EU — multi-tenant, multilingual, secured by thousands of automated tests.

Why#

Whoever introduces a platform for studies, exams and staff wants to know what they are relying on.

How it works#

  1. 1Nothing to install: the platform runs in every current browser on computer, tablet and phone.
  2. 2Every institution is a tenant of its own with its own brand; its data is separated from that of other tenants.
  3. 3Every feature can be switched per tenant.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Key facts#

  • Web application with pages generated on the server and interactive parts in the browser
  • Relational database with row-level protection per tenant, file storage and sign-in — location Frankfurt
  • Execution of the application in an EU region (Frankfurt)
  • Interface in fifteen languages
  • Every feature switchable per tenant, every module bookable individually

Operation and data in the EU

liveStudentsTeaching staffAdministrationOperator

Data and processing are in the EU — as a hard rule in the code that an automated test checks on every change, not as a default.

Why#

Universities and companies have to prove where personal data is processed. A promise on a website only helps if it is in the code and is checked.

How it works#

  1. 1User data, exam results, certificates and payment data are in the database in Frankfurt.
  2. 2The application itself runs in an EU region; the region is in the configuration in the source code and applies to every deployment — including every future customer instance.
  3. 3An automated test fails as soon as someone removes the region, empties it or sets it to one outside the EU.
  4. 4Speech recognition (speaking instead of typing) runs in the EU and would rather refuse service than fall back to a provider outside the EU. A fallback is only possible with an explicitly set switch that is off by default.
  5. 5The machines for the avatar videos are in a data centre in the EU.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Why this is a rule in the code#

When the installation was moved, it turned out that the application ran in a region outside the EU — not as a decision, but as the hosting's default for new projects. The database was in Frankfurt, the processing was not. Since then the region has been in the source code, and a test checks it: a setting in an administration interface is invisible, one in the source code appears in every change.

What is processed where#

  • Database, file storage, sign-in — Frankfurt
  • Application — an EU region
  • Speech recognition — EU, without silent fallback
  • The workshop's language model — optionally an EU-hosted model (Paris); which models a tenant uses, it decides itself
  • Avatar videos — own machines in an EU data centre

Language models receive course content as context and the question — no names or account data; speech output receives the text to be spoken.

Tips#

  • London is in Europe, but not in the EU — the test knows the difference.
  • Whoever wants to know which data goes to which service finds this (after signing in as administration) under “Technology & Security” → “Data flows”.

Under review#

For speech output and image generation the location of processing is not equally reliably documented in the code for every service; the details are in the protected entries and are marked as under review there where necessary.

AI on the platform — what it may and may not do

liveStudentsTeaching staffAdministrationOperator

AI writes suggestions, presents courses and answers questions — labelled, bound to sources and with fixed limits: it does not assess exam behaviour and decides nothing that a person must decide.

Why#

Trust in AI arises from clear rules that can be looked up — and that are held in place in the code by guards, not only in a policy.

How it works#

  1. 1Labelled: presenter and voice-over are visibly marked as AI-generated above every slide, with “What exactly?” for the details (Fig. 1).
    Fig. 1 The notice above every slide: presenter and voice-over are AI-generated, with “What exactly?” — below it the slide it refers to.
    The notice above every slide: presenter and voice-over are AI-generated, with “What exactly?” — below it the slide it refers to.

    Fig. 1 The notice above every slide: presenter and voice-over are AI-generated, with “What exactly?” — below it the slide it refers to.

  2. 2Suggestion instead of decision: in the workshop nothing lands on a slide unasked; for papers there is a grade proposal, a person sets the grade.
  3. 3Bound to sources: answers in the course pass through a verification chain; what is unsupported is marked as such; the inventory is checked against sources on a schedule.
  4. 4Guardrails: attempts to get the AI out of its role, to query internals or to cause harm are fended off and logged.
  5. 5Choice of model: every tenant decides which language models the workshop may use; one of them works in the EU (Paris).

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Where AI explicitly does not decide#

  • Exam proctoring — the machine counts incidents, a person reviews and releases; a guard only allows the release at two places.
  • Grades — for papers there is a proposal, the teacher sets the grade.
  • Slides — generated images, graphics and texts are suggestions; only “Accept” inserts them. A guard prevents the route past the suggestion bar.
  • Competences — AI may suggest competences and assessments; only what those responsible for the course have approved takes effect, and a “demonstrated” needs several independent pieces of evidence.
  • Disputed facts — are not decided but shown with both supported positions.

Labelling under the AI Act#

The transparency obligation of the European AI Act (Art. 50) requires that people recognise when they are talking to AI or seeing AI-generated content. That is why the notice appears above every slide, lecturers' own avatars are likewise labelled as AI-generated, and the platform shows on its quality page how content is checked.

Every call is recorded#

Every call to an external AI or speech service goes through one single recording point; limits at 80, 95 and 100 percent ensure that a conversation ends in a friendly way instead of breaking off when the quota is used up.

Tips#

  • The checking tool for papers is explicitly classified in the guideline as a high-risk system within the meaning of the European AI Act.
  • There is deliberately no AI score for cheating — and no machine that judges an incident in an exam.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/probe

Chapter 12

Outlook

What has been decided and is being built, in the owner's order: first legacy issues, then the new editor, then the competence diagnosis, then competence continuity, then the apps. Plus the product map: the Universe Ultimate Suite and the Universe Competence Academy with Classroom, Tutoring, Corporate and Coaching — the page “How it all fits together” shows how everything connects.

Load test for many concurrent users

in progressOperator

Measurements of how many concurrent users the installation can handle — measured up to 150 reading users, the large stages are pending.

Why#

An exam week is a load peak. Only what has been measured is reliable — and only what has been measured repeatably may go into a service description.

How it works#

  1. 1The tool runs: it walks a student's route (home page, sign-in form, course list, course page, an image), does not sign in and creates no render jobs.
  2. 2Before the start it states how many requests the run will make; above 50,000 and against production it requires explicit confirmation.
  3. 3The large stages need a preview environment with a copy of the database and load from several lines.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

What has been measured#

  • Up to 100 concurrent readers the installation answers all requests: 0 errors in 4,050 requests over six runs, 95 % of answers under 400 ms.
  • At 150 the first timeouts occur (0.13 %), and the slowest 5 % take over one second — no server error, no throttling.
  • Measured from one computer against production, reading routes only; the line was not the limit.

Figures above 150 concurrent users cannot be guaranteed as long as the load comes from only one computer.

Planned scope#

  • Stages with 100, 1,000 and 5,000 enrolled students — designed according to the timetable, not only the statistics: at 9 am the whole lecture wants to get in at the same time.
  • Response times per surface (course player, voice-over, subtitles, avatar, achievement archive, verification chain)
  • behind that database, cache hit rate, queue of the avatar machines, errors of external services and costs per run
  • a load profile like a university day instead of even load

Dependencies#

  • a preview environment with a copy of the database and test persons recognisable as fictitious — never against real records and exams
  • load from several lines
  • a fixed cost cap that aborts a run with real services instead of letting it get expensive

The avatar in the meeting

in progressTeaching staffOperator

The avatar joins a video conference appointment, labelled as AI, listens and answers when addressed with title and name.

Why#

An appointment with the familiar figure without the person behind it having to attend every time — with clear rules: recognisable as AI, only those who have consented are transcribed, summary only after approval.

How it works#

  1. 1The operator creates the appointment under “Avatar in the meeting”: conferencing tool, join link, time, figure, image, voice and cost centre.
  2. 2The avatar joins with the display name “… (AI avatar)”; the default is the figure's still image.
  3. 3It greets everyone and says that an AI system is speaking here. In a short round everyone states their name and whether they agree.
  4. 4It only answers when someone addresses it with title and name (“Mr Holtermann …”). Whoever interrupts it stops it.
  5. 5Shortly before the end it points out the time and asks whether to extend; at the end it says goodbye.
  6. 6Afterwards a draft of the evaluation is created — only from contributions of those who have consented. The operator approves or discards it.
  7. 7After approval the operator opens “Preview and sending”: they enter the email addresses that consenting participants provided, set the ticks, look at the email and confirm sending. The summary goes to these people and to the organiser — in the language of the appointment, with the summary as an attachment.
  8. 8If someone who has consented joins later, the operator sends the summary to them individually: choose the person, view the preview, confirm.

Settings and switches#

  • Switchable per tenantDefault: offModule: Avatar im Meeting
  • Switchable per tenant, default off; separate module “Avatar in the meeting” with its own price.
  • Image per appointment: still image (default), profile picture with camera off or live video.
  • Voice per appointment: high-quality voice clone (default), fast voice clone or own speaker.
  • Behaviour if not everyone consents: stay (default) or say goodbye politely.
  • Language of the appointment (one of the platform's fifteen languages) — the avatar speaks in it, and the summary goes out in it; in German additionally the form of address (formal or informal).
  • Organiser per appointment (name and address): they receive the summary too; if not specified, it is whoever creates the appointment.

When the avatar speaks#

It only answers when addressed directly with title and name — “Mr Holtermann”, “Professor Holtermann”, “Doctor Holtermann” —, even if speech recognition slightly mishears the name. The first name alone is never enough, because there may be other people with this first name in the appointment.

A short call without a title only wakes the technology in advance so that the answer comes faster. If someone mentions it in the third person (“… said yesterday …”), it stays silent.

Consent and evaluation#

  • Consent applies per person: only what someone who has consented says is transcribed and evaluated.
  • A no does not stop the whole appointment — it removes everything this person says from transcript and evaluation.
  • What cannot be reliably attributed to a consenting person is not stored either.
  • The evaluation only contains what came up in the conversation: what it was about, recommendations and exactly three next steps — otherwise the lists remain empty.
  • It is always a draft first and only goes out after review and approval by a person.

The summary by email#

  • Only an approved evaluation is sent and only at the push of the operator's button — never a draft, never automatically.
  • Recipients are people who consented in the appointment and provided an address, and the organiser. Whoever said no or withdrew is not on the list and cannot be selected either.
  • Before sending, the preview shows exactly the email that goes out — as a designed version and as plain text.
  • Every address receives the summary exactly once, even if clicked twice. If delivery to an address fails, it can be retried; whoever already has it does not get it again.
  • The email states what it was about, the recommendations and the three next steps, plus the notice that it was created by an AI system and reviewed and approved by the operator, a data protection notice and the contact address.
  • Once all selected addresses have been served, the evaluation is set to “sent”. Every sending run is in the log — with figures, never with addresses.

The summary as an attachment#

  • Every email additionally carries the summary as a file: the same content as the email, in the look of the installation, with the notice that it was created by an AI system, the date of the appointment, the approval note and the creation date.
  • In German, English, French, Italian, Spanish, Polish, Swedish, Dutch, Ukrainian and Russian this is a PDF.
  • In Chinese, Japanese, Arabic, Hebrew and Hindi it is an HTML file that can be opened and printed in the browser — in the correct writing direction. For these scripts the PDF route cannot set the characters cleanly; the recipient's browser can.
  • If a summary contains characters that the PDF cannot set — such as Chinese names in a German appointment —, the HTML file automatically goes out instead of a PDF with empty boxes.
  • The file name states the occasion and the date of the appointment. The preview shows the attachment with name and size; it can be downloaded there.
  • If the file were too large, the email goes out without an attachment — it contains the complete text anyway.

Sending to individual people afterwards#

  • Once sending is complete, the summary can be sent afterwards to individual further people — only to people who consented in the appointment, or to the organiser.
  • Exactly one person per action: enter the address (if there is none yet), “Send afterwards”, view the preview for this person, confirm.
  • Every address receives the summary at most once — whoever already received it in the first sending cannot be selected again. A failed later sending can be retried.
  • The evaluation's sending date remains that of the first sending; every later sending is in the log individually — without the address.

Sending afterwards needs a database change that still has to be approved. Until then the surface shows “not yet enabled”.

Still image and live video#

The default is the figure's still image with sound. The live video with lip movement costs per minute and only starts when the responsible person has explicitly confirmed the displayed price per minute and has specified a cost centre. Without confirmation it stays with the still image.

Billing is per started minute from the start of the video; usage can be evaluated per appointment and cost centre.

Joining the individual conferencing tools is not yet switched on; the feature is switchable per tenant and off by default.

Who may do what#

  • Create appointments, confirm costs, approve drafts and send the summary: only the operator.
  • Only the operator of the own tenant reads transcript and consents; writing happens only on the server.

Tips#

  • Whoever does not agree simply says no: then nothing is transcribed or evaluated from this person — the others' contributions remain.
  • Whoever joins later is asked; until then nothing is transcribed from them.
  • “Please stop transcribing” takes effect immediately and deletes your own contributions.

Under review#

Flow, appointment management, cost confirmation and approval are built and tested; joining the individual conferencing tools follows as soon as servers and accounts are ready.

Universe Ultimate Suite — the product map

plannedStudentsTeaching staffAdministrationOperator

The platform as thirteen products: Stage, Live, Studio, Avatar, Compass, Exam, Proof, Campus, Recap, Room, Lingua, Guide, Control.

Why#

Customers buy solutions, not switches. The map arranges the existing features into products with names of their own.

How it works#

  1. 1The map has been decided; the scope of the individual products will follow.
  2. 2Every product has an entry of its own with the inventory available today that belongs to it by name, and its dependencies.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The thirteen products#

  • Universe Stage — Edit and present slides — the stage.
  • Universe Live — Together and in real time — live co-learning, live answers from the avatar.
  • Universe Studio — Build courses — the course workshop.
  • Universe Avatar — Figures and voices.
  • Universe Compass — Orientation about your own competence.
  • Universe Exam — Assessing.
  • Universe Proof — Proving — certificates, badges, verification codes.
  • Universe Campus — Studies and university administration.
  • Universe Recap — Repeat and summarise.
  • Universe Room — Shared rooms.
  • Universe Lingua — Languages.
  • Universe Guide — Guidance and advice.
  • Universe Control — Operations and administration.

Products, modules, switches#

Today the platform sells modules (see “Modules & prices”), and every module sets switches of the feature catalogue. The products of the suite are one level above: names under which modules are to be bundled into solutions. How product and module relate to each other is part of the review.

Under review#

Which features and modules exactly belong to which product is under review.

Universe Stage

plannedTeaching staff

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Edit and present slides — the stage.

Why#

Universe Stage is to bundle existing features under one name: Edit and present slides — the stage. What already belongs to it today is listed below under “Available today”.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the product map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the related features can be used individually — see “Related features”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today#

  • the slide editor with history, versions, camera path, several speakers and build-up in time with the voice
  • presenting in full screen and as a video
  • presenter view with notes, laser, pen and rehearsal
  • zoom canvas with path
  • beam from phone

Dependencies#

  • splitting off the stage core as an app of its own (see “The stage as an app of its own”)
  • new input routes — gestures, phone, voice, second device — are planned
  • history on every device as soon as the corresponding database change has been applied

What is still open#

Scope, delimitation from the other products and price have not yet been settled. Only what exists today is described here — without a promise of what the product will one day comprise, and without a date.

Under review#

Scope, delimitation and price of the product are under review.

Universe Live

plannedStudentsTeaching staff

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Together and in real time — live co-learning, live answers from the avatar.

Why#

Universe Live is to bundle existing features under one name: Together and in real time — live co-learning, live answers from the avatar. What already belongs to it today is listed below under “Available today”.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the product map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the related features can be used individually — see “Related features”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today#

  • Watching together — one slide for several people, with camera if desired
  • Questions to the presenter in the course player, by voice or text

Dependencies#

  • the live avatar in conversation: the IT control centre currently lists this stage as “not yet connected”
  • the computing capacity of the avatar machines; for many simultaneous conversations the number of machines is the limit

What is still open#

Scope, delimitation from the other products and price have not yet been settled. Only what exists today is described here — without a promise of what the product will one day comprise, and without a date.

Under review#

Scope, delimitation and price of the product are under review.

Universe Studio

plannedTeaching staff

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Build courses — the course workshop.

Why#

Universe Studio is to bundle existing features under one name: Build courses — the course workshop. What already belongs to it today is listed below under “Available today”.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the product map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the related features can be used individually — see “Related features”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today#

  • course from material, as a script, as a 1:1 adoption or empty
  • Content, Design, Speakers, Publish — the four phases of the workshop
  • choice of the text model per tenant

Dependencies#

  • topping up the workshop credit is not yet connected
  • a third text model is not yet connected

What is still open#

Scope, delimitation from the other products and price have not yet been settled. Only what exists today is described here — without a promise of what the product will one day comprise, and without a date.

Under review#

Scope, delimitation and price of the product are under review.

Universe Avatar

plannedTeaching staffAdministration

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Figures and voices.

Why#

Universe Avatar is to bundle existing features under one name: Figures and voices. What already belongs to it today is listed below under “Available today”.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the product map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the related features can be used individually — see “Related features”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today#

  • the platform's figures and voices
  • several speakers on one slide — videos per section, ordered on request
  • My avatar — make yourself the speaker, with consent
  • pronunciation corrections for the whole installation

Dependencies#

  • finished videos are never re-created automatically — every new version needs an approval

What is still open#

Scope, delimitation from the other products and price have not yet been settled. Only what exists today is described here — without a promise of what the product will one day comprise, and without a date.

Under review#

Scope, delimitation and price of the product are under review.

Universe Compass

plannedStudents

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Orientation about your own competence.

Why#

Universe Compass is to bundle existing features under one name: Orientation about your own competence. What already belongs to it today is listed below under “Available today”.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the product map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the related features can be used individually — see “Related features”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today#

  • competence diagnosis with evidence, level and next learning step
  • mastery per course
  • the competency matrix of people development (deliberately not connected to the diagnosis)

Dependencies#

  • the database changes of the competence diagnosis and its acceptance with real models
  • competence continuity (repetition, versioned evidence)

What is still open#

Scope, delimitation from the other products and price have not yet been settled. Only what exists today is described here — without a promise of what the product will one day comprise, and without a date.

Under review#

Scope, delimitation and price of the product are under review.

Universe Exam

plannedTeaching staffStudentsAdministration

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Assessing.

Why#

Universe Exam is to bundle existing features under one name: Assessing. What already belongs to it today is listed below under “Available today”.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the product map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the related features can be used individually — see “Related features”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today#

  • create, release, take and evaluate exams
  • proctoring with human review
  • achievement archive and ECTS account

Dependencies#

  • imported question pools as a real exam (see “Imported questions as an exam”)

What is still open#

Scope, delimitation from the other products and price have not yet been settled. Only what exists today is described here — without a promise of what the product will one day comprise, and without a date.

Under review#

Scope, delimitation and price of the product are under review.

Universe Proof

plannedStudentsAdministration

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Proving — certificates, badges, verification codes.

Why#

Universe Proof is to bundle existing features under one name: Proving — certificates, badges, verification codes. What already belongs to it today is listed below under “Available today”.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the product map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the related features can be used individually — see “Related features”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today#

  • tamper-proof certificates and transcripts with a public verification page
  • calculated badges
  • training records of people development with validity

Dependencies#

  • a portable competence passport with QR sharing is planned (see “One competence engine, several learning applications”)

What is still open#

Scope, delimitation from the other products and price have not yet been settled. Only what exists today is described here — without a promise of what the product will one day comprise, and without a date.

Under review#

Scope, delimitation and price of the product are under review.

Universe Campus

plannedAdministrationStudents

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Studies and university administration.

Why#

Universe Campus is to bundle existing features under one name: Studies and university administration. What already belongs to it today is listed below under “Available today”.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the product map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the related features can be used individually — see “Related features”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today#

  • application, admission, enrolment
  • student administration with record, examinations office and transcript
  • the switch between studies and administration

Dependencies#

  • according to the tour switch, payment processing is still being connected
  • sign-in via the university's sign-in system is built, but not yet tested against a real federation

What is still open#

Scope, delimitation from the other products and price have not yet been settled. Only what exists today is described here — without a promise of what the product will one day comprise, and without a date.

Under review#

Scope, delimitation and price of the product are under review.

Universe Recap

plannedStudents

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Repeat and summarise.

Why#

Universe Recap is to bundle existing features under one name: Repeat and summarise. What already belongs to it today is listed below under “Available today”.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the product map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the related features can be used individually — see “Related features”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today#

  • flashcards and pocket quiz in the player
  • podcast and flashcast
  • the learning workshop for your own material

Dependencies#

  • repetition at suitable intervals belongs to the planned competence continuity

What is still open#

Scope, delimitation from the other products and price have not yet been settled. Only what exists today is described here — without a promise of what the product will one day comprise, and without a date.

Under review#

Scope, delimitation and price of the product are under review.

Universe Room

plannedStudentsTeaching staff

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Shared rooms.

Why#

Universe Room is to bundle existing features under one name: Shared rooms. What already belongs to it today is listed below under “Available today”.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the product map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the related features can be used individually — see “Related features”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today#

  • real-time group work with methods, timer and submission
  • watching together

Dependencies#

  • no open building block named in the code; the scope is under review

What is still open#

Scope, delimitation from the other products and price have not yet been settled. Only what exists today is described here — without a promise of what the product will one day comprise, and without a date.

Under review#

Scope, delimitation and price of the product are under review.

Universe Lingua

plannedStudentsTeaching staff

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Languages.

Why#

Universe Lingua is to bundle existing features under one name: Languages. What already belongs to it today is listed below under “Available today”.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the product map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the related features can be used individually — see “Related features”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today#

  • interface in fifteen languages
  • courses in several languages with each learner's own choice of language

Dependencies#

  • for slides with several speakers the assignment sentence → speaker in translated languages is still missing

What is still open#

Scope, delimitation from the other products and price have not yet been settled. Only what exists today is described here — without a promise of what the product will one day comprise, and without a date.

Under review#

Scope, delimitation and price of the product are under review.

Universe Guide

plannedStudentsTeaching staffAdministrationOperator

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Guidance and advice.

Why#

Universe Guide is to bundle existing features under one name: Guidance and advice. What already belongs to it today is listed below under “Available today”.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the product map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the related features can be used individually — see “Related features”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today#

  • this handbook
  • the knowledge section with articles in German and English
  • Maike, the concierge

Dependencies#

  • the content of the handbook and the knowledge section exists in German and English; the other interface languages show the English version until their own translation arrives

What is still open#

Scope, delimitation from the other products and price have not yet been settled. Only what exists today is described here — without a promise of what the product will one day comprise, and without a date.

Under review#

Scope, delimitation and price of the product are under review.

Universe Control

plannedOperatorAdministration

Product of the Universe Ultimate Suite: Operations and administration.

Why#

Universe Control is to bundle existing features under one name: Operations and administration. What already belongs to it today is listed below under “Available today”.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the product map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the related features can be used individually — see “Related features”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today#

  • feature catalogue per tenant and demo mode
  • modules & prices with contract and history
  • control centre, costs, usage, controlling
  • the whole admin back end

Dependencies#

  • the assignment of administration surfaces as a checklist for customer instances

What is still open#

Scope, delimitation from the other products and price have not yet been settled. Only what exists today is described here — without a promise of what the product will one day comprise, and without a date.

Under review#

Scope, delimitation and price of the product are under review.

Universe Competence Academy

plannedTeaching staffAdministrationOperator

The umbrella for competence offerings: Universe Classroom, Tutoring, Corporate and Coaching — and a marketplace on which partners offer their courses.

Why#

Good courses should arrive where they are needed — in schools, companies and with individuals — and their authors should earn from them. All Academy offerings share one competence engine.

How it works#

  1. 1The Academy bundles four offerings: Universe Classroom (schools), Universe Tutoring, Universe Corporate and Universe Coaching.
  2. 2Marketplace, variant 1: a partner lists their courses; 70 percent of the revenue goes to them.
  3. 3Marketplace, variant 2: a partner operates a tenant of their own and pays a subscription for it.
  4. 4The page “How it all fits together” in the handbook shows how everything connects.
  5. 5On the website the Academy is under /plattform/academy — with a page per offering, the curriculum pipeline and the partner model with a calculator (70 percent or own tenant).

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

The four offerings#

  • Universe Classroom — an AI assistant for schools with its own, self-operated models.
  • Universe Tutoring — scope under review.
  • Universe Corporate — scope under review; by name it connects to people development.
  • Universe Coaching — scope under review.

What all offerings share#

  • One competence engine — the same rules for tasks, evidence and level as in the competence diagnosis.
  • A portable competence passport — the evidence belongs to the learner and can be shared via QR code.
  • The platform's tenants, brand and switches — every offering runs in its own, strictly separated tenant.

Under review#

Process, contract terms and launch date are under review — as is which offerings come first.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/academy

Universe Classroom

plannedTeaching staffStudentsAdministration

An AI assistant for schools: with its own, self-operated models, faithful to the curriculum, under the control of teachers, with avatar and youth protection.

Why#

Schools need AI that fits the curriculum, does not bypass the teacher and protects children and young people — and that does not run on someone else's service.

How it works#

  1. 1The basis is the official curricula, broken down into learning objectives that a teacher confirms (curriculum pipeline).
  2. 2The assistant teaches and practises along these learning objectives; the teacher keeps control over content and use.
  3. 3An avatar accompanies learning.
  4. 4The models run in the platform's own operation, not with an external provider.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Five principles#

  • Own, self-operated models — the AI runs in the platform's own operation, not with an external provider.
  • Faithful to the curriculum — what the official curriculum provides is taught, via learning objectives that a teacher has confirmed.
  • Control by teachers — the teacher decides what the assistant does and what it does not.
  • Avatar — a visible, speaking learning companion, as in the course player.
  • Youth protection — the assistant is designed for children and young people; the rules in detail are under review.

Under review#

Age groups, types of school, the operating model of the own models, the youth protection rules in detail and the launch date are under review.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/academy/classroom

Universe Tutoring

plannedStudentsTeaching staff

An offering of the Universe Competence Academy for learning support and tutoring. What it comprises in detail is under review.

Why#

It sits under the Academy next to Classroom, Corporate and Coaching and uses the same competence engine. By name it is about individual learning support — by an AI, a person or both.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the Academy's map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the related features can be used individually — see “Related features”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today and related by name#

  • Tutor chat in the course player — questions to a tutor during the course, protected by the AI guardrails
  • Learning modes — being asked Socratic questions, explaining back, example, exercise
  • Competence diagnosis — identify a gap, targeted learning step, reassess
  • Lecturers' office hours and study partners in the community

Dependencies#

  • the accepted competence diagnosis as the Academy's shared engine
  • the decision on scope and delimitation from Classroom and Coaching

Only what exists today is described — without a promise and without a date.

Under review#

Target group, scope, delimitation from Classroom and Coaching and price are under review.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/academy/tutoring

Universe Corporate

plannedAdministrationOperator

An offering of the Universe Competence Academy for companies. What it comprises in detail is under review.

Why#

It sits under the Academy next to Classroom, Tutoring and Coaching. Available today and related by name is the platform's people development: learning paths, onboarding, mandatory training and competency matrix.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the Academy's map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the modules “HR & further training” and “Employee onboarding” can be booked individually.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today and related by name#

  • People development with learning paths, assignments, deadlines and every employee's own area
  • Onboarding as a journey with phases, buddies and mandatory courses
  • Mandatory training with records and automatic refreshers
  • Competency matrix with self-assessment
  • the package “Company – onboarding” in module management

Dependencies#

  • the decision on how the offering is delimited from today's people development
  • the separation of competence diagnosis and HR views remains in place

Only what exists today is described — without a promise and without a date.

Tips#

  • Evidence from the competence diagnosis never flows into HR views — this principle also applies to an offering for companies.

Under review#

Scope, delimitation from people development and price are under review.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/academy/corporate

Universe Coaching

plannedStudentsTeaching staff

An offering of the Universe Competence Academy for guidance and development. What it comprises in detail is under review.

Why#

It sits under the Academy next to Classroom, Tutoring and Corporate. By name it is about guidance beyond individual courses — by people, by AI or by both.

How it works#

  1. 1It is on the Academy's map; the exact scope will follow.
  2. 2Until then the related features can be used individually — see “Related features”.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Available today and related by name#

  • Mentoring in the community
  • Role play — conversation exercise with an AI figure, with assessment
  • Lecturers' office hours
  • Buddies and mentors in people development assignments

Dependencies#

  • the decision whether people, AI or both coach
  • the Academy's shared competence engine

Only what exists today is described — without a promise and without a date.

Under review#

Target group, scope, whether people, AI or both coach, and price are under review.

Try it yourself#

Scan the QR code or press the button

The page is open without sign-in.

Try it yourself

https://uds-system.de/plattform/academy/coaching

Curriculum pipeline DACH

plannedTeaching staffAdministration

Official curricula from Germany, Austria and Switzerland are broken down into learning objectives with prerequisites; a teacher confirms every learning objective; a change watch reports when a curriculum changes.

Why#

“Faithful to the curriculum” is only a promise if every learning objective goes back to an official source, has been confirmed by a person and stays up to date.

How it works#

  1. 1Source: the official curricula of the German federal states and the Swiss cantons (and Austria).
  2. 2The AI breaks them down into individual learning objectives and recognises which learning objectives require which others.
  3. 3A teacher checks and confirms every learning objective individually — none is used before that.
  4. 4The change watch monitors the sources; if a curriculum changes, the affected learning objectives are submitted for confirmation again.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

Four stages#

  • 1 Official curriculum — the source, with version and date.
  • 2 Learning objectives with prerequisites — suggested by the AI, each with a reference back to the place in the curriculum.
  • 3 Confirmation — a teacher confirms, changes or discards every learning objective.
  • 4 Change watch — new version of a curriculum → submit the affected learning objectives again.

The prerequisites between learning objectives are the same kind of dependency that the competence diagnosis knows between competences.

Tips#

  • The same principle already applies today in the competence diagnosis: AI may suggest, only what a person has approved takes effect.

Under review#

Which states, types of school and subjects come first, how often the change watch checks and who counts as the confirming teacher are under review.

One competence engine, several learning applications

plannedStudentsTeaching staffAdministration

The platform's competence engine also works in other learning applications, such as the student app — and learners take their evidence with them as a portable competence passport, shared via QR code.

Why#

Competence does not only arise in one course on one platform. Whoever learns in different places should be checked by the same rules everywhere and own their credentials themselves.

How it works#

  1. 1Today: the domain core of the competence diagnosis has already been built independently — without ties to the platform's database, interface or roles, with its own version number and its own tests.
  2. 2Another learning application adopts this core as a versioned copy with an adoption log and only builds its own connections — at run time it does not depend on the platform.
  3. 3Today: the competence profile releases your own evidence as a structured, verifiable file (with fingerprints) — the precursor of the passport.
  4. 4Planned: the competence passport — the evidence from all learning applications in one place, shared via QR code with whomever the learner wants.

Settings and switches#

No switch of its own in the feature catalogue — the feature belongs to its surroundings.

How it fits together#

  • Competence engine — the rules: tasks, rubrics, evidence, level, gaps, reassessment.
  • Learning applications — the platform, the student app, later the Academy's offerings; each with its own interface and its own data storage.
  • Competence passport — belongs to the learner; they decide by QR sharing who sees which evidence.

No automatic synchronisation between the applications: larger adoptions run via a versioned adoption log.

Open standards#

For a passport that others can verify, open standards come into question — Open Badges for badges and Verifiable Credentials for signed, machine-verifiable credentials. The platform already issues verifiable credentials today for certificates and training records.

Under review#

Signature, format of the passport, the QR sharing process and the timing are under review. Today's competence diagnosis deliberately does not yet issue a certificate or a QR verification.

Glossary

Administration
The role for the day-to-day business of a university: applications, student records, examinations office, transcripts — without operation and costs of the installation.
AI labelling
The visible notice that presenter and voice-over are AI-generated.
Assessment round
A group of works that are all checked with the same checking tools.
Assignment
A learning path given to a person with a start, a deadline and optionally a buddy and a mentor.
Beam
Throwing a photo from the phone straight onto the slide — via QR code.
Buddy
A colleague who accompanies a new employee during onboarding.
Calibration
How well your own confidence matches your hit rate — evaluated in flashcards and pocket quiz.
Cameo
The small speaker window in the presentation, which can be shown and hidden.
Camera path
Stops on a slide that are zoomed in one after another in time with the voice; with a timeline and test run in the slide editor.
Campus
The university's interface with the menus Studies, Teaching, Administration, Service and Quality & Governance. The campus demo works with sample data.
Cast
Which figure with which voice speaks a course or a range of slides.
Change watch
Monitors the official curricula; if one changes, the affected learning objectives are submitted for confirmation again.
Class (cohort)
A group of students that a lecturer leads through a course together.
Command
At the core of the slide editor every edit is a small, storable command. That is why a second device can replay the same steps.
Competence
An observable ability — not a chapter and not a lesson that has been read. It has a learning outcome, a level and an assessment rubric.
Competence check
The flow of the competence diagnosis from the learner's point of view: per competence a comprehension question, a follow-up question if needed and a task from practice.
Competence diagnosis
Checks in conversation whether someone can apply knowledge: tasks from practice, assessment per criterion with evidence, the specific gap, a targeted learning step and a new task for reassessment.
Competence engine
The rules of the competence diagnosis as a separate, versioned core without ties to database or interface — so that several learning applications use the same rules.
Competence passport
Planned: the evidence from all learning applications in one place, owned by the learner, shared via QR code.
Competence profile
Per competence the level derived from your own answers, what it is based on and what is still missing — an assessment from evidence, not a measurement.
Competency matrix
Competencies per role with a target level and the current level per employee.
Consent
The signed agreement of the person depicted, separately for image and voice. Without it no figure is built; a withdrawal takes effect immediately.
Control ring
The round button in the mobile player that opens all functions as a fan — each with icon and word.
Course player
The place where a course runs: slide, speaking avatar, subtitles and learning tools.
Course workshop
The authoring tool with which lecturers build a course with slides, narration, figure and voice from their material.
Curriculum pipeline
Planned: official curricula from Germany, Austria and Switzerland → broken down by the AI into learning objectives with prerequisites → confirmed by a teacher → kept up to date by a change watch.
Customer instance
A separate installation for a single customer, with its own database and its own domain — the same software, one switch.
Default figure
The figure that presents a course without its own cast — with its own voice assigned to it.
Demo mode
The operator hides features only in their own browser to keep a demonstration lean.
Demo role
A fixed demo account (lecturer, registry, HR management) that shows the real surface of a role — only with fictitious people.
Demonstrated
The highest level of a competence: shown in several independent tasks, including in practice. Before that: not assessed, learning need identified, developing — or still unclear.
Disputed assessment
An automatic assessment with high uncertainty or an attempt to give the assessment instructions. It only counts once a teacher confirms or corrects it.
Divided doctrine
For disputed questions both supported positions are shown instead of deciding for one.
ECTS
Credit points under the European system; they are listed in the achievement archive.
Element
A building block on a slide: text, image, video, graphic, shape or speaker spot.
Evidence
An assessed answer to a competence, with a justification per criterion and a verbatim quote. “Demonstrated” needs two independent pieces of evidence, one of them from practice.
Evidence copy
A copy of what an online source said at the time it was accessed; the resubmission checks whether the source still says the same.
Evidence file
Your own evidence from the competence diagnosis as a structured, verifiable file with fingerprints — the precursor of the competence passport, not a certificate.
External profile
A student's talent profile for companies and alumni — visible only if they set it that way (default: nobody).
Feature (switch)
A single capability of the platform that can be switched on and off per tenant. Off means: not there.
Figure
The face of an avatar, built from a photo — with mouth shapes, blinking and eyebrows.
Flashcast
A short podcast that sums up the material in a few minutes.
Grade proposal
The platform's assessment of a piece of work. The grade itself is always set by a person.
Guard
An automated test that checks a rule across the whole source code and permanently prevents mistakes that were once made — always with a counter-check.
Guardrails
Fixed rules and checks that keep every AI on the platform within its bounds.
Guest (speaker)
An additional speaker on a slide with their own figure and their own spot. They speak only with their own voice, in a separate video per section — as long as one is missing, they appear as a still image.
Guideline
The rulebook for academic work; every objection in a review cites a rule from it.
Half figure
The speaker cut out next to the content, without a frame; the slide moves to the side.
Head start
Production runs ahead of the viewer: the first slides are ready as video, the rest is created while watching.
History
The list of all editing steps of a slide. You can go back, forward and jump to any earlier state — including abandoned ones.
How it all fits together
The handbook page with three diagrams: overall structure, Competence Academy in detail, cycle of a competence.
Knowledge section
The public articles under “Knowledge”: questions about learning platforms, courses, further education and credentials — answered briefly first, then in depth, with sources and date.
Learning and assessment mode
The two modes of the competence check. In assessment mode there are no hints; whoever switches to learning mode gets help — the task then counts as practice, not as evidence.
Learning application
An application in which learning happens — the platform itself, the student app, later the offerings of the Academy. All are to use the same competence engine.
Learning mode
The way of learning chosen in the player: being asked Socratic questions, explaining back, example, exercise.
Learning objective
A single objective from a curriculum, with the learning objectives it requires. It is only used once a teacher has confirmed it.
Learning path
A sequence of steps with deadlines and owners in people development — for onboarding, mandatory training or further development.
Learning tools
Flashcards, pocket quiz, mind map, podcast and tutor chat — generated from the course material right in the player.
Learning workshop
The surface where study material is created from courses or your own material — study guide, cards, quiz, study plan.
LTI
A standard with which another learning system launches a Universe course and receives the grade back.
Mastery
The overview per course: exam readiness, confidence per knowledge area, open misconceptions.
Minimum count
A survey only shows results from five responses upwards — below that, one could work out who answered.
Module
A bookable package of features with a price, e.g. “Exams” or “Course Studio”. Booking sets the switches that belong to the module.
Narration
What the avatar says about a slide. If it changes, the video for that slide is ordered again.
Next learning step
The recommendation from the competence diagnosis: an existing learning method at the right slide, aimed at an identified gap.
Onboarding journey
The planned onboarding of a new employee from before the start until day 90.
Open Badges
An open standard for digital badges that others can verify.
Operator
Whoever runs an installation of the platform and manages all tenants: switches features, books modules, sees costs.
Own voice
The rule: every face speaks only with the voice assigned to it — or not at all. There is no substitute voice.
People development
The tool for the workforce: onboarding, mandatory training, competencies and records.
Phase
One of the four stages of the course workshop: Content, Design, Speakers & Interaction, Publish.
Presenter view
The private view of the presenter with notes and the next slide.
Proctoring
Individual camera photos and window switches during an online exam — announced openly, kept for 90 days.
Quota
The amount of avatar minutes or conversations a session may use; with notices at 80 and 95 percent and a gentle end at 100.
Reassessment
After a learning step a new, equivalent task in a different context — never the same one. The level follows only from the new evidence.
Refresher
The new cycle of a mandatory training that starts on its own 30 days before the record expires.
Rendering
Producing a lecture video for a slide on the avatar machines. Finished videos are never re-rendered on their own, only after approval.
Review folder
The view of a checked piece of work: findings with rule numbers, check log, grade proposal and the grade that the examiner sets personally.
Row-level protection
The database itself decides which rows a user may see. So even a faulty page cannot show someone else's data.
Rubric
The criteria by which an answer is assessed, 0 to 3 points per criterion. It is fixed before the answer; a change creates a new version.
SAMPLE (MUSTER)
The watermark on every certificate print without a valid server signature.
SCORM
A standard format for course packages. Universe plays third-party packages and exports its own courses in this format.
Speaker spot
The place on a slide where the avatar stands — as a bubble, half figure or large; at most one per slide.
Sphere
An area of this handbook — e.g. Learning, Stage or Technology & Security. On the title page the spheres orbit as celestial bodies.
Stage
The new slide editor: the slide large, every element directly editable, with history and versions.
Status live · in progress · planned · under review
The states in this handbook: usable · being built · decided · not reliably documented in code and documents.
Student record
Master data, matriculation number and history of a student in the administration.
Suggestion
What an AI has generated before a person accepts it. Nothing lands on a slide unasked.
Support access
A time-limited, justified and revocable permission with which the provider's support may view exactly one case.
Template
A ready-made way of presenting a slide (e.g. bullet list, comparison). On the first change in the slide editor it is converted into freely movable elements; “Back to template” is possible at any time.
Tenant
An institution on the platform — a university or a company — with its own brand, its own modules and strictly separated data.
Tour
A separate throwaway student per visitor, so that several testers do not see each other.
Trial access
A temporary account that is created without signing in — as a student or as an author in the workshop. It disappears after one day.
Universe Classroom
Planned: an AI assistant for schools with its own, self-operated models, faithful to the curriculum, under the control of teachers, with avatar and youth protection.
Universe Coaching
Planned: an offering of the Academy; its scope is under review.
Universe Competence Academy
The umbrella for competence offerings — Classroom, Tutoring, Corporate, Coaching — and a marketplace for partners.
Universe Corporate
Planned: an offering of the Academy for companies; its scope is under review.
Universe Tutoring
Planned: an offering of the Academy; its scope is under review.
Unverified
A state of its own next to “supported” and “refuted”: the check was not possible, e.g. because a source could not be reached. That is not an accusation.
Verifiable credential
A digitally signed credential following an open standard, with validity and revocation status.
Verifiable Credentials
An open standard for signed, machine-verifiable credentials. The platform already issues certificates and training records this way.
Verification chain
The route by which statements are checked against sources: two independent models and a rule-based judge.
Verification code
The unguessable code of a credential; with it anyone can check without an account whether the credential is genuine and valid.
Version
A named, saved state of a slide that you can return to at any time.
Visibility level
Who sees a profile: nobody, other graduates, graduates and verified companies, or everyone.
Watch-along room
The room for live co-learning: the host controls the slides, the others watch and respond.
Workshop credit
An organisation's credit account for the AI usage of the workshop.
Workspace
The shared surface of group work with notes, methods, timer, submission and assessment.
xAPI
A standard for learning events that are sent to a university's learning record store.
Zoom canvas
The whole course as one large surface; the presentation flies from slide to slide.

← Back to the handbook